OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

deTec4
Safety light curtain
 Described product
deTec4

Manufacturer
SICK AG
Erwin-Sick-Str. 1
79183 Waldkirch
Germany

Legal information
This work is protected by copyright. Any rights derived from the copyright shall be
reserved for SICK AG. Reproduction of this document or parts of this document is
only permissible within the limits of the legal determination of Copyright Law. Any modi‐
fication, abridgment or translation of this document is prohibited without the express
written permission of SICK AG.
The trademarks stated in this document are the property of their respective owner.
© SICK AG. All rights reserved.

Original document
This document is an original document of SICK AG.

2 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONTENTS

Contents
1 About this document........................................................................ 8
1.1 Purpose of this document........................................................................ 8
1.2 Scope......................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Target groups of these operating instructions........................................ 8
1.4 Additional information.............................................................................. 8
1.5 Symbols and document conventions...................................................... 9

2 Safety information............................................................................ 10
2.1 Basic safety notes..................................................................................... 10
2.2 Intended use............................................................................................. 11
2.3 Inappropriate use..................................................................................... 12
2.4 Cybersecurity............................................................................................ 12
2.5 Requirements for the qualification of personnel.................................... 12

3 Product description........................................................................... 13
3.1 Product identification via the SICK product ID....................................... 13
3.2 Product identification in mounted state.................................................. 13
3.3 Structure and function............................................................................. 13
3.4 Product characteristics............................................................................ 15
3.4.1 Overview of the device (sender and receiver)........................ 15
3.4.2 Absence of blind zones........................................................... 15
3.4.3 IO-Link...................................................................................... 15
3.4.4 Near Field Communication (NFC)........................................... 16
3.4.5 Function packages................................................................... 16
3.4.6 System plug.............................................................................. 17
3.4.7 Extension module.................................................................... 18
3.4.8 Status indicators...................................................................... 20
3.5 Example applications............................................................................... 23

4 Project planning................................................................................ 26
4.1 Manufacturer of the machine.................................................................. 26
4.2 Operating entity of the machine.............................................................. 26
4.3 Design........................................................................................................ 26
4.3.1 Scanning range and protective field width............................. 27
4.3.2 Minimum distance of the safety light curtain to the hazard‐
ous point................................................................................... 30
4.3.3 Minimum distance from reflective surfaces.......................... 33
4.3.4 Protection against interference from systems in close prox‐
imity to each other................................................................... 36
4.3.5 Reduced resolution................................................................. 40
4.3.6 Muting....................................................................................... 41
4.3.7 Smart Box Detection................................................................ 59
4.3.8 Multiple sampling.................................................................... 67
4.3.9 Operating mode selection....................................................... 67

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 3

Subject to change without notice
CONTENTS

4.4 Integration into the electrical control system.......................................... 71

4.4.1 Restart interlock...................................................................... 73
4.4.2 External device monitoring (EDM).......................................... 76
4.4.3 Application diagnostic output................................................. 77
4.4.4 Signal lamp.............................................................................. 80
4.4.5 Connection of sender and receiver........................................ 80
4.4.6 Laser alignment aid................................................................. 81
4.4.7 Cascading................................................................................. 83
4.4.8 Smart presence detection....................................................... 84
4.4.9 IO-Link...................................................................................... 85
4.4.10 Muting....................................................................................... 86
4.4.11 Control switch for Smart Box Detection Override.................. 87
4.4.12 Control switches for operating modes.................................... 88
4.4.13 Inputs for safety sensors (SDI)............................................... 88
4.4.14 Connection diagrams.............................................................. 89
4.5 Testing plan............................................................................................... 89
4.5.1 Test rod check.......................................................................... 90
4.5.2 Visual check of the machine and the protective device........ 93

5 Mounting............................................................................................. 94
5.1 Unpacking.................................................................................................. 94
5.2 Fitting the system plug............................................................................. 94
5.3 Mounting................................................................................................... 95
5.3.1 Mounting the QuickFix bracket............................................... 98
5.3.2 Mounting the FlexFix bracket.................................................. 100
5.3.3 Mounting the replacement bracket........................................ 103

6 Electrical installation........................................................................ 104

6.1 Security...................................................................................................... 104
6.2 System connection (M12, 5-pin)............................................................. 106
6.3 System connection (M12, 8-pin)............................................................. 107
6.4 Extension connection (M12, 5-pin)......................................................... 108
6.5 Additional connections on the DMM4 extension module...................... 109

7 Configuration..................................................................................... 111
7.1 Security...................................................................................................... 111
7.2 Overview.................................................................................................... 111
7.3 Factory settings......................................................................................... 112
7.4 Configuration mode.................................................................................. 113
7.5 Configuration via system plug.................................................................. 114
7.5.1 Possible combinations of functions on SP2 system plug..... 116
7.5.2 Configuring beam coding........................................................ 117
7.5.3 Configuring muting.................................................................. 118
7.5.4 Configuring the protective field width..................................... 120
7.5.5 Configuring reduced resolution (Basic).................................. 121
7.5.6 Configuring smart presence detection................................... 122

4 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONTENTS

7.5.7 Configuring Smart Box Detection........................................... 123

7.5.8 Checking the parity.................................................................. 124
7.5.9 Configuring the restart interlock............................................. 125
7.5.10 Configuring external device monitoring (EDM)...................... 125
7.5.11 Configuring application diagnostic output............................. 126
7.5.12 Configuring cascading............................................................. 127
7.5.13 Resetting to factory settings via DIP switches....................... 129
7.6 Configuration via Safety Designer........................................................... 130
7.6.1 Safety Designer configuration software................................. 130
7.6.2 Overview................................................................................... 134
7.6.3 Configuring the system............................................................ 134
7.6.4 Starting and stopping safety function.................................... 145
7.6.5 Report....................................................................................... 145
7.6.6 Service...................................................................................... 146
7.7 Service functions of the mobile app........................................................ 147
7.8 User groups............................................................................................... 148
7.9 Automatic restoration of the configuration when a device is replaced. 149

8 Commissioning.................................................................................. 152
8.1 Overview.................................................................................................... 152
8.2 Switching on.............................................................................................. 153
8.3 Aligning the sender and receiver............................................................. 153
8.3.1 Alignment with the QuickFix bracket...................................... 155
8.3.2 Alignment with the FlexFix bracket or with the replacement
bracket......................................................................................
156
8.3.3 Alignment quality display........................................................ 157
8.4 Check during commissioning and modifications.................................... 158

9 Operation............................................................................................ 159
9.1 Overview.................................................................................................... 159
9.2 Regular thorough check........................................................................... 159

10 Maintenance...................................................................................... 160
10.1 Regular cleaning....................................................................................... 160
10.2 Regular thorough check........................................................................... 161

11 Troubleshooting................................................................................. 162
11.1 Overview.................................................................................................... 162
11.2 Security...................................................................................................... 162
11.3 Diagnostic LEDs........................................................................................ 162
11.3.1 Indications when switching on................................................ 163
11.3.2 Status indicator........................................................................ 167
11.3.3 Fault indicators........................................................................ 173
11.4 Diagnostics using Safety Designer.......................................................... 182
11.4.1 Message history....................................................................... 182
11.4.2 Data recorder........................................................................... 183
11.4.3 Event history............................................................................. 185

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 5

Subject to change without notice
CONTENTS

11.4.4 Status of the beams................................................................ 185

11.5 Diagnostics using the mobile app........................................................... 185
11.6 Diagnostics via SOPAS ET........................................................................ 186

12 Decommissioning............................................................................. 187
12.1 Disposal..................................................................................................... 187

13 Technical data.................................................................................... 188

13.1 Version numbers and functional scope.................................................. 188
13.2 Data sheet................................................................................................. 189
13.3 Number of beams in the system............................................................. 193
13.4 Response time.......................................................................................... 194
13.5 Tolerance times........................................................................................ 198
13.6 Power consumption.................................................................................. 199
13.7 Length of cable......................................................................................... 200
13.8 Table of weights........................................................................................ 202
13.9 Dimensional drawings.............................................................................. 203

14 Ordering information........................................................................ 204

14.1 Scope of delivery....................................................................................... 204
14.2 Ordering information................................................................................. 204

15 Accessories........................................................................................ 207
15.1 Brackets.................................................................................................... 207
15.2 Mounting accessories.............................................................................. 207
15.3 Extension modules................................................................................... 207
15.4 Weld spark guard...................................................................................... 207
15.5 Connection technology............................................................................. 208
15.6 Alignment aid............................................................................................ 211
15.7 Deflector mirrors....................................................................................... 211
15.7.1 Function and use..................................................................... 211
15.7.2 Change in scanning range using deflector mirrors................ 212
15.7.3 Deflector mirror PNS75 - ordering information...................... 213
15.7.4 Deflector mirror PNS125 - ordering information................... 213
15.8 Mirror columns.......................................................................................... 214
15.9 Device columns......................................................................................... 214
15.10 Cleaning agent.......................................................................................... 215
15.11 Test rods.................................................................................................... 215
15.12 Muting accessories................................................................................... 215
15.13 Additional accessories............................................................................. 217

16 Annex.................................................................................................. 218
16.1 Conformities and certificates................................................................... 218
16.1.1 EU declaration of conformity................................................... 218
16.1.2 UK declaration of conformity.................................................. 218
16.2 Note on standards.................................................................................... 218
16.3 Checklist for initial commissioning and commissioning........................ 220

6 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONTENTS

17 List of figures..................................................................................... 221

18 List of tables....................................................................................... 223

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 7

Subject to change without notice
1 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

1 About this document

1.1 Purpose of this document
These operating instructions contain information required during the life cycle of the
safety light curtain.
These operating instructions are available to all those who work with the safety light
curtain.
Please read these operating instructions carefully and make sure that you understand
the content fully before working with the safety light curtain.

1.2 Scope
This document applies to the following products:
• Product code: deTec4
• “Operating instructions” type label entry: 8021643
Document identification
Document part number:
• This document: 8021645
• Available language versions of this document: 8021643
You can find the current version of all documents at www.sick.com.

1.3 Target groups of these operating instructions

Some sections of these operating instructions are intended for certain target groups.
However, the entire operating instructions are relevant for intended use of the product.
Table 1: Target groups and selected sections of these operating instructions
Target group Sections of these operating instructions
Project developers (planners, developers, "Project planning", page 26
designers) "Configuration", page 111
"Technical data", page 188
"Accessories", page 207
Installers "Mounting", page 94
Electricians "Electrical installation", page 104
Safety experts (such as CE authorized repre‐ "Project planning", page 26
sentatives, compliance officers, people who "Configuration", page 111
test and approve the application) "Commissioning", page 152
"Technical data", page 188
"Checklist for initial commissioning and com‐
missioning", page 220
Operators "Operation", page 159
"Troubleshooting", page 162
Maintenance personnel "Maintenance", page 160
"Troubleshooting", page 162

1.4 Additional information

www.sick.com
The following information is available on the Internet:
• Data sheets and application examples
• CAD data and dimensional drawings

8 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT 1

• Certificates (e.g. EU declaration of conformity)

• Guide for Safe Machinery Six steps to a safe machine

1.5 Symbols and document conventions

The following symbols and conventions are used in this document:

Warnings and other notes

DANGER
Indicates a situation presenting imminent danger, which will lead to death or serious
injuries if not prevented.

WARNING
Indicates a situation presenting possible danger, which may lead to death or serious
injuries if not prevented.

CAUTION
Indicates a situation presenting possible danger, which may lead to moderate or minor
injuries if not prevented.

NOTICE
Indicates a situation presenting possible danger, which may lead to property damage if
not prevented.

NOTE
Highlights useful tips and recommendations as well as information for efficient and
trouble-free operation.

Instructions to action
► The arrow denotes instructions to action.
1. The sequence of instructions for action is numbered.
2. Follow the order in which the numbered instructions are given.
✓ The check mark denotes the result of an instruction.

LED symbols
These symbols indicate the status of an LED:
o The LED is off.
Ö The LED is flashing.
O The LED is illuminated continuously.

Sender and receiver

These symbols indicate the sender and receiver of the device:
s The symbol indicates the sender.
r The symbol indicates the receiver.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 9

Subject to change without notice
2 SAFETY INFORMATION

2 Safety information
2.1 Basic safety notes
Integrating the product

DANGER
The product can not offer the expected protection if it is integrated incorrectly.
► Plan the integration of the product in accordance with the machine requirements
(project planning).
► Implement the integration of the product in accordance with the project planning.

Mounting and electrical installation

DANGER
Death or severe injury due to electrical voltage and/or an unexpected startup of the
machine
► Make sure that the machine is (and remains) disconnected from the voltage
supply during mounting and electrical installation.
► Make sure that the dangerous state of the machine is and remains switched off.

Repairs and modifications

DANGER
Improper work on the product
A modified product may not offer the expected protection if it is integrated incorrectly.
► Apart from the procedures described in this document, do not repair, open, manip‐
ulate or otherwise modify the product.

10 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 SAFETY INFORMATION 2

Laser notes

CAUTION
Laser class 1

LASER
1

Figure 1: Laser class 1

This device has been classified in accordance with the following standards:
• IEC 60825-1:2014
• EN 60825-1:2014 with A11:2021
• 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for changes due to Laser Notice No. 56
dated May 8, 2019
The laser is eye-safe. Looking directly into the laser may cause temporary impairments.
The outlet opening of the laser radiation is located in the sender, see figure 6,
page 20. The laser is only active when the laser alignment aid is switched on.
The laser marking is located on the back of the sender.
► You must comply with the latest version of the applicable laser safety regulations.

CAUTION
Optical radiation: Class 1 Laser Product
Caution - if any operating or calibrating equipment other than those specified here are
used or other methods are employed, this can lead to dangerous exposure to radiation.
► Use only the tools and auxiliary equipment specified in this documentation.
► Only carry out the procedures specified in this documentation.
► Do not open the housing unless carrying out the mounting and maintenance
operations provided in this documentation.

2.2 Intended use

The deTec4 safety light curtain is an electro-sensitive protective device (ESPE) and is
suitable for the following applications:
• Hazardous point protection
• Access protection
• Hazardous area protection

The product may be used in safety functions.

The deTec4 safety light curtain must only be used within the limits of the prescribed
and specified technical data and operating conditions at all times.
Any instance of improper use, incorrect modification, or manipulation of the deTec4
safety light curtain shall void any warranty provided by SICK AG; furthermore, SICK AG
shall not accept any responsibility or liability for any resulting damage and consequen‐
tial damage.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 11

Subject to change without notice
2 SAFETY INFORMATION

2.3 Inappropriate use

The safety light curtain works as an indirect protective measure and cannot provide
protection from parts thrown out nor from emitted radiation. Transparent objects are
not detected.
Among others, the deTec4 safety light curtain is not suitable for the following applica‐
tions:
• Outdoors
• Underwater
• In explosion-hazardous areas
• At altitudes over 3,000 m above sea level
• In environments with increased levels of ionizing radiation

2.4 Cybersecurity
Overview
To protect against cybersecurity threats, the operator must have a comprehensive
cybersecurity concept, which must be continuously monitored and maintained. A suita‐
ble concept consists of organizational, technical, procedural, electronic, and physical
levels of defense and considers suitable measures for different types of risks. The
measures implemented in this product can only support protection against cybersecur‐
ity threats if the product is used as part of such a concept.
You will find further information at www.sick.com/psirt, e.g.:
• General information on cybersecurity
• Contact option for reporting vulnerabilities
• Information on known vulnerabilities (security advisories)

2.5 Requirements for the qualification of personnel

The safety light curtain must only be configured, installed, connected, commissioned
and serviced by qualified safety personnel.

Project planning
You need safety expertise to implement safety functions and select suitable products
for that purpose. You need expert knowledge of the applicable standards and regula‐
tions.

Mounting, electrical installation and commissioning

You need suitable expertise and experience. You must be able to assess if the machine
is operating safely.

Configuration
You need suitable expertise and experience. You must be able to assess if the machine
is operating safely.

Operation and maintenance

You need suitable expertise and experience. You must be instructed in machine oper‐
ation by the machine operator. For maintenance, you must be able to assess if the
machine is operating safely.

12 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

3 Product description
3.1 Product identification via the SICK product ID
SICK product ID
The SICK product ID uniquely identifies the product. It also serves as the address of the
web page with information on the product.
The SICK product ID comprises the host name pid.sick.com, the part number (P/N),
and the serial number (S/N), each separated by a forward slash.
For newer products, the SICK product ID is displayed as text and QR code on the type
label and/or on the packaging.

Figure 2: SICK product ID

3.2 Product identification in mounted state

In addition to the SICK Product ID on the type label, the product identification informa‐
tion is also printed on the front of the device. The following information is also visible in
the mounted state:
• Device type
• Part number (P/N)
• Serial number (S/N)

3.3 Structure and function

Overview
The deTec4 safety light curtain is an electro-sensitive protective device (ESPE) consist‐
ing of a sender and receiver.
A series of parallel infrared light beams forms a protective field between sender and
receiver that protects the hazardous area (hazardous point, access, and hazardous
area protection). When one or more light beams are completely interrupted, the safety
light curtain reports the interruption in the light path to the OSSDs (safety outputs) by a
signal change. The machine or its control system must evaluate the signals safely (e.g.,
via a safety controller or safety relay) and end the dangerous state.
Sender and receiver automatically synchronize themselves optically. An electrical con‐
nection between both components is not required, but is advantageous.
The safety light curtain can be combined with an extension module for an extended
functional scope and the option of software configuration.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 13

Subject to change without notice
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

s r

Figure 3: Sender and receiver

Protective field height

The protective field height indicates the range within which the test rod belonging to the
safety light curtain is reliably detected.

Protective field width

The protective field width is the dimension of the light path between sender and
receiver. The maximum protective field width is limited by the scanning range.

Resolution
The resolution describes the size of the smallest object detected by the safety light
curtain in the protective field. The resolution corresponds to the diameter of the test rod
belonging to the safety light curtain.

The safety light curtain has a physical resolution of 14 mm. This resolution provides
finger protection.

The safety light curtain has a physical resolution of 30 mm. This resolution provides
hand protection.

Scanning range
The scanning range limits the maximum protective field width.
The scanning range is reduced by using deflector mirrors.
The scanning range is reduced by using a weld spark guard.

Further topics
• "Extension module", page 18
• "Connection of sender and receiver", page 80
• "Data sheet", page 189

14 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

3.4 Product characteristics

3.4.1 Overview of the device (sender and receiver)

3 4

6
5
Figure 4: Overview of the device (sender or receiver)
1 End cap with integrated indicator LED (available as an option on the receiver)
2 Sender or receiver
3 System plug
4 Terminal compartment
5 Extension connection (only for certain system plugs)
6 System connection

3.4.2 Absence of blind zones

The design and construction of the safety light curtain extends the protective function
of a device to the end of the housing without any blind spots. The absence of blind
zones reduces the space requirement when integrated in the machine.
Exception: If the end cap on the receiver contains an integrated LED, the protective
function of the device only extends to below the LED.

3.4.3 IO-Link
Overview
The product can communicate with an IO-Link master via an IO-Link connector, which is
available as an accessory.
You can use the IO-Link interface to read out diagnostic and configuration data from
the connected devices and control individual system functions.
The IO-Link connector can also be used to connect two signals (e.g., muting signals).

Complementary information
The product must be supplied with voltage to enable communication with an IO-Link
master via the IO-Link connector.
Additional information on connecting the IO-Link connector can be found in the IO-Link
connector mounting instructions.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 15

Subject to change without notice
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Further topics
• "Accessories", page 207
• "IO-Link", page 85

3.4.4 Near Field Communication (NFC)

Overview
The receiver of the protective device has an integrated NFC interface for transmitting
diagnostic and configuration data from all devices of the protective device connected to
the receiver to an NFC-enabled device.
The NFC-capable antenna is integrated behind the front screen of the receiver. The area
is marked with the NFC symbol.

Figure 5: NFC symbol 1)

The integrated NFC interface is intended for temporary use.

Further topics
• "Diagnostics using the mobile app", page 185
• "Service functions of the mobile app", page 147

3.4.5 Function packages

The product can be used with different function packages. The function packages are
determined by the equipment used.
Table 2: Function packages
Function pack‐ Equipment
age
SP1 • Receiver with SP1 system plug
• Sender with SP1 system plug
• Optional for cascade: Additional receivers and senders with SP1 system
plug
SP2 • Receiver with SP2 system plug
• Sender with SP1 system plug
• Optional for cascade: Additional receivers and senders with SP1 system
plug
DMM4 1) • Receiver with SP1 system plug
• Sender with SP1 system plug
• DMM4 extension module
• Optional for cascade: Additional receivers and senders with SP1 system
plug
1) Available for devices with a physical resolution of 30 mm.

Table 3: Function packages and included functions

Function SP1 SP2 DMM4 1)
Beam coding ✓ ✓ ✓
Restart interlock ✓ ✓ ✓
Smart restart interlock – – ✓
1) The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries.

16 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

Function SP1 SP2 DMM4 1)

External device monitoring (EDM) ✓ ✓ ✓
Application diagnostic output ✓ ✓ ✓
Cascading ✓ ✓ ✓
Smart presence detection – ✓ ✓
Reduced resolution (Basic) – ✓ ✓
Manual adjustment of the protective field – ✓ ✓
width
Transmitting power adjustment – – ✓
Muting (2-signal muting) – ✓ ✓
Muting (4-signal muting) – – ✓
Partial muting – ✓ ✓
Smart Box Detection – ✓ –
Operating mode selection – – ✓
Configurable multiple sampling – – ✓
Inputs for safety sensors (SDI) – – ✓
1) Available for devices with a physical resolution of 30 mm.

3.4.6 System plug

Overview
By using a system plug, the functions of the corresponding function package are
available to you.
The following system plugs are available for the product:
• SP1 system plug
• SP2 system plug
Each system plug is available in the following types:
• System plug with 5-pin system connection
• System plug with 8-pin system connection
• System plug with 5-pin system connection and 5-pin extension connection
• System plug with 8-pin system connection and 5-pin extension connection
Using the system plugs
The SP1 system plug can be used on all of the senders and receivers of a single system
or on a host–guest system.
The SP2 system plug is only used on the receiver of a host system or single system. The
SP1 system plug is used on all other receivers of the guest systems and on all senders.
When using an extension module, SICK recommends selecting the SP1 system plug for
the sender and receiver.

NOTE
The SP2 system plug can only be used with receivers that have the digit 1 at the
following position of their type code:
C4P-E*****1***

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 17

Subject to change without notice
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Table 4: Use of SP1 system plug in a single system

SP1 system plug type code
1000 1200 1100 1300

Sender ✓ ✓ 1) ✓ 2) ✓ 1) 2)
Receiver ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ SP1 system plug suitable.
1) At the sender, the 8-pin system connection is solely for the purposes of providing standardized wiring.
It is recommended if the 8-pin system connection at the receiver is used and the sender and receiver are
connected to each other via a T-splitter.
The 8-pin system connection is also recommended if the sender is connected to an extension module.
2) If a sender does not have an additional guest connected to it, the extension connection has no function
and must be sealed with a protective cap.

Table 5: Use of SP2 system plug in a single system

SP2 system plug type code
2000 2200 2100 2300

Sender – – – –
Receiver ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ SP2 system plug suitable.
– SP2 system plug not suitable. An SP1 system plug must be used at the sender of a single system.

Table 6: Use of system plugs in a cascade

SP1 system plug type code SP2 system plug type code
1000 1100 1300 2100 2300

Host Sender – ✓ ✓ 1) – –
Receiver – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
First guest Sender – ✓ – – –
(for cascade ✓
Receiver – – – –
with 2 guest
devices)
Last guest Sender ✓ ✓ 2) – – –
Receiver ✓ ✓ – – –
✓ System plug suitable.
– System plug not suitable. An SP1 system plug must be used on the receiver of a guest system as well as on the sender of a host system
and guest system.
1) At the sender, the 8-pin system connection is solely for the purposes of providing standardized wiring. It is recommended if the 8-pin
system connection at the receiver is used and the sender and receiver are connected to each other via a T-splitter.
The 8-pin system connection is also recommended if the sender is connected to an extension module.
2) If a sender does not have an additional guest connected to it, the extension connection has no function and must be sealed with a
protective cap.

3.4.7 Extension module

Overview
The product can be combined with an extension module. By using an extension module,
the functions of the corresponding function package and the ability to configure the
software are available to you.

18 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

The following extension modules are available for the product:

• DMM4
The DMM4 extension module provides the following extensions:
• Function package DMM4
• Additional inputs and outputs (application diagnostic outputs)
• USB interface for using the Safety Designer software for the devices of the ESPE
(sender, receiver) and the extension module itself
° Configuration
° Diagnostics
° Service functions
• Configuration memory for the devices of the ESPE (sender, receiver) and the
extension module (when using software configuration)
• Ability to connect the sender and receiver via the extension module:
° Protective field status display on the sender
° Status display (e.g., muting active, reset required) on the sender
° Sender diagnostics via NFC or IO-Link
Connection
The extension module is connected to the system connection of the receiver of a host
or single system. As soon as this is done, the system connection of the extension
module becomes the system connection for the entire system (extension module with
ESPE).
The receiver automatically detects the connected extension module. If the extension
module already contains a configuration, this is applied to the connected devices of the
ESPE.
The sender can optionally also be connected to the extension module.

NOTE
The extension modules can only be connected to the following receivers:
• Type codes contain the number 1 at the following position in the numerical
sequence: C4P-E*****1***
• Functional scope V 1.2.0 or higher
The extension modules can only be connected to the following senders:
• Type codes contain the number 1 at the following position in the numerical
sequence: C4P-S*****1***
• Functional scope V 1.1.0 or higher

Combination with system plugs

You can use an extension module in combination with the SP1 or SP2 system plugs.
SICK recommends using it in combination with the SP1 system plug.

Complementary information
If you do not need the extended functions and the corresponding connections of the
extension module, you can also just temporarily connect an extension module to the
receiver (and the sender if required) in order to use the USB interface.
This allows you to use the Safety Designer functions and perform the following tasks,
for example:
• Change the configuration and, for example, adjust muting parameters.
• Perform a diagnosis without changing the existing configuration.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 19

Subject to change without notice
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Further topics
• "Function packages", page 16
• "Automatic restoration of the configuration when a device is replaced", page 149

3.4.8 Status indicators

Overview
The sender and receiver LEDs indicate the operational status of the safety light curtain.

Sender displays

Figure 6: Sender displays

The sender has one laser alignment aid, and at least two light emitting diodes that
indicate the operational status.
Table 7: Sender displays
Position LED color Function Labeling
1 Red/yellow/green Field indicator ;1)
–
shows the status of
the protective field
and additional infor‐
mation about the sta‐
tus display
2 – Laser alignment aid –
For easy alignment of
the sender.
3 Red/yellow/green Status indicator STATE
1) Safety light curtains with protective field height > 300 mm have multiple LEDs for the field indicator.

20 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

Receiver displays

1
56 78

1 2 34

Figure 7: Receiver displays

At least 10 LEDs on the receiver indicate the operational status.

Table 8: Receiver displays
Position LED color Function Labeling
1 Red/yellow/green Field indicator ; 1)
–
shows the status of
the protective field
and additional infor‐
mation about the sta‐
tus display
2 Blue/red/yellow/white Diagnostics and align‐ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
ment quality
3 Red/green OSSD state OSSD
4 Red/yellow/green End cap with inte‐ –
grated LED (optional)
1) Safety light curtains with protective field height > 300 mm have multiple LEDs for the field indicator.

For a simple alignment of the receiver, diagnostic LEDs 1, 2, 3 and 4 indicate the
alignment quality once the safety light curtain has been switched on.
Diagnostic LEDs 5 and 6 light up if the topmost beam (far from system plug) is
synchronized. Diagnostic LEDs 7 and 8 light up if the bottommost beam (near system
plug) is synchronized.
The integrated indicator lamp in the end cap of the receiver assumes the indications of
the field display.

Further topics
• "Diagnostic LEDs", page 162

3.4.8.1 Indication of diagnostic LEDs

Table 9: Colors and their meaning
Color Meaning
White Configuration status

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 21

Subject to change without notice
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Color Meaning
Blue Alignment quality
Red Fault indication
Yellow Warning

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

Table 10: Indication of the configuration status

Diagnostic LEDs Color Configuration
1 O White External device monitoring (EDM) is config‐
ured. (If no software configuration is active)
2 O White Cascade with 1 or with 2 guest devices is con‐
figured. (If no software configuration is active)
3 O White Beam coding is configured. (If no software con‐
figuration is active)
4 O White Restart interlock is configured. (If no software
configuration is active)
5 O White Muting or Smart Box Detection is configured.
(If no software configuration is active)
6 O White Reduced resolution is configured. (If no soft‐
ware configuration is active)
7 O White A range for the protective field width (manual
setting) is configured. (If no software configura‐
tion is active)
8 O White Software configuration is active.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

Table 11: Alignment quality display

Diagnostic LEDs Color Meaning
1 ... 4 O Blue Indication of the alignment quality.
If only one diagnostic LED lights up, the align‐
ment is insufficient. If all 4 diagnostic LEDs
light up, the alignment is excellent.
5, 6 O Blue The topmost beam (far from system plug) is
synchronized.
7, 8 O Blue The bottommost beam (near system plug) is
synchronized.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

Table 12: Fault indication

Diagnostic LEDs Color Meaning
1 ... 8 O Red A red illuminated diagnostic LED signals the
function at which an error has occurred.
1 ... 8 Ö Red A red flashing diagnostic LED signals the rea‐
son for the error.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

Example: If diagnostic LED 1 lights up red and diagnostic LED 5 flashes red, an EDM
error exists.

22 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

Table 13: Warnings

Diagnostic LED Color Meaning
1 ... 8 O Yellow A yellow illuminated diagnostic LED signals
which function is affected.
1 ... 8 Ö Yellow A yellow flashing diagnostic LED signals the
reason for the warning.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

Example: If diagnostic LED 5 lights up yellow and diagnostic LED 3 flashes yellow, the
sensor gap monitoring was exceeded.

Further topics
• "Diagnostic LEDs", page 162

3.5 Example applications

Figure 8: Hazardous point protection

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 23

Subject to change without notice
3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Figure 9: Access protection

Figure 10: Hazardous area protection

24 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3

Figure 11: Access protection with smart presence detection, implemented using cascade

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 25

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

4 Project planning
4.1 Manufacturer of the machine
The manufacturer of the machinery must carry out a risk assessment and apply appro‐
priate protective measures. Further protective measures may be required in addition to
the product.
The product must not be tampered with or changed, except for the procedures descri‐
bed in this document.
The product must only be repaired by the manufacturer of the product or by someone
authorized by the manufacturer. Improper repair can result in the product not providing
the expected protection.

4.2 Operating entity of the machine

Changes to the electrical integration of the product in the machine controller and
changes to the mechanical mounting of the product necessitate a new risk assess‐
ment. The results of this risk assessment may require the entity operating the machine
to meet the obligations of a manufacturer.
After each change to the configuration, it is necessary to check whether the protective
measure provides the necessary protection. The person making the change is responsi‐
ble for ensuring that the protection measure provides the necessary protection.
The product must not be tampered with or changed, except for the procedures descri‐
bed in this document.
The product must only be repaired by the manufacturer of the product or by someone
authorized by the manufacturer. Improper repair can result in the product not providing
the expected protection.

4.3 Design
Overview
In this section you will find important information for design.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► Make sure that the following construction requirements are met so that the safety
light curtain can fulfill its protective function.
° Sender and receiver must be arranged such that persons or parts of the body
are reliably detected when they enter the hazardous area.
° Reaching under, over, and around as well as moving the safety light curtain
must be prevented.
° Check whether additional protective measures (e.g. restart interlock) are
necessary when it is possible for people to be located between the protective
device and the hazardous point without being detected.

26 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Certain types of light radiation can influence the protective device, e.g., light radiation
from fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast installed in the path of the beam, or
beams from laser pointers directed at the receiver.
► If this type of light radiation is present in the environment of the protective device,
take additional measures to ensure that the protective device does not become
dangerous.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► Make sure that the optical properties of the front screens of the sender and
receiver are not changed, e.g., by:
° beading water, mist, frost, or ice formation. If applicable, remove films or
other types of contamination, disconnect the voltage supply of the receiver
and then switch it back on.
° Scratches or damage. Replace the device if the front screen is scratched or
damaged.
► Make sure that all reflective surfaces and objects maintain a minimum distance
from the protective field.
► Make sure that no dispersive media (e.g., dust, fog, or smoke) are within the
calculated minimum distance from the protective field.

Further topics
• "Mounting", page 94

4.3.1 Scanning range and protective field width

Protective field width
The protective field width is the dimension of the light path between sender and
receiver. The maximum protective field width is limited by the scanning range.

Scanning range
The scanning range limits the maximum protective field width. The protective field width
can change during operation depending on the setting.
The scanning range is reduced by using deflector mirrors.
The scanning range is reduced by using a weld spark guard.

Setting the protective field width

You can set the protective field width in the following ways:
• Automatic calibration of the protective field width:
° The protective field width is automatically calibrated during initialization each
time the safety light curtain is switched on. There must be no object in the
protective field.
° The position of the safety light curtain may not change later.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 27

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

• Manual adjustment of the protective field width:

° You define a range within which the protective field width can vary. The
protective field width can change within this range even during operation.
° Use this variant if you need a dynamic protective field width or if you want to
reduce the scanning range.
° If you reduce the scanning range, you can reduce the minimum distance to
identical systems. Therefore, select the smallest possible range that covers
the desired protective field width.
The scanning range can be reduced further, if required:
• "Using a sender with a small scanning range", page 39
• "Transmitting power adjustment", page 38
Complementary information
The minimum distance to reflective surfaces and identical systems depends on the
maximum protective field width.

Further topics
• "Minimum distance from reflective surfaces", page 33
• "Minimum distance to identical systems", page 39
• "Technical data", page 188
• "Weld spark guard", page 207
• "Deflector mirrors", page 211

4.3.1.1 Manual adjustment of the protective field width

Overview
You can select a range within which the protective field width can vary during operation.
The actual size of the range depends on the resolution.
You can also reduce the transmitting power of the sender, which further reduces the
actual size of the ranges. You can reduce the transmitting power of the sender either
via software configuration or by using a sender with a small scanning range.

Important information

NOTE
The selected range must cover the entire required protective field width and has an
effect on the minimum distance to reflective surfaces and identical systems.
► Select the smallest possible range that covers both the lower and upper limits of
the required protective field width.

Prerequisites
• Function package SP2 or DMM4

Adjustable ranges
The actual size of the range depends on the resolution and the transmitting power.
Table 14: Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (full transmitting
power, resolution 14 mm)
Configuration Resulting range for the protective field width
Minimum 1) Typical 2)
Very small range 3) 0.15 m … 2.8 m 0.15 m … 3.5 m
Small range 0.15 m … 4 m 0.15 m … 5 m

28 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Configuration Resulting range for the protective field width

Minimum 1) Typical 2)
Medium range 1m…8m 1 m … 10 m
Large range 2 m … 16 m 2 m … 20 m
1) The minimum scanning range specifies a range in which a function is guaranteed to operate correctly
and safely under industrial conditions. A sufficient level of signal reserve to ensure very high availability is
included in the calculation.
2) The typical scanning range indicates a range in which the ESPE functions perfectly and reliably under
industrial conditions. The level of signal reserve is enough to ensure high availability.
3) The setting is only possible via software configuration.

Table 15: Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (reduced transmitting
power, resolution 14 mm)
Configuration Resulting range for the protective field width
Minimum 1) Typical 2)
Very small range 3) 0.15 m … 1.4 m 0.15 m … 1.8 m
Small range 0.15 m … 2 m 0.15 m … 2.5 m
Medium range 3)
0.15 m … 4 m 0.15 m … 5 m
Large range 3)
1m…8m 1 m … 10 m
1) The minimum scanning range specifies a range in which a function is guaranteed to operate correctly
and safely under industrial conditions. A sufficient level of signal reserve to ensure very high availability is
included in the calculation.
2) The typical scanning range indicates a range in which the ESPE functions perfectly and reliably under
industrial conditions. The level of signal reserve is enough to ensure high availability.
3) The setting is only possible via software configuration.

Table 16: Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (full transmitting
power, resolution 30 mm)
Configuration Resulting range for the protective field width
Minimum 1) Typical 2)
Very small range 3) 0 m … 4.2 m 0 m … 5.3 m
Small range 0m…6m 0 m … 7.5 m
Medium range 0 m … 12 m 0 m … 15 m
Large range 0 m … 24 m 0 m … 30 m
1) The minimum scanning range specifies a range in which a function is guaranteed to operate correctly
and safely under industrial conditions. A sufficient level of signal reserve to ensure very high availability is
included in the calculation.
2) The typical scanning range indicates a range in which the ESPE functions perfectly and reliably under
industrial conditions. The level of signal reserve is enough to ensure high availability.
3) The setting is only possible via software configuration.

Table 17: Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (reduced transmitting
power, resolution 30 mm)
Configuration Resulting range for the protective field width
Minimum 1) Typical 2)
Very small range 3)
0 m … 2.1 m 0 m … 2.7 m
Small range 0m…3m 0 m … 3.8 m
Medium range 3)
0m…6m 0 m … 7.5 m
Large range 3)
0 m … 12 m 0 m … 15 m
1) The minimum scanning range specifies a range in which a function is guaranteed to operate correctly
and safely under industrial conditions. A sufficient level of signal reserve to ensure very high availability is
included in the calculation.
2) The typical scanning range indicates a range in which the ESPE functions perfectly and reliably under
industrial conditions. The level of signal reserve is enough to ensure high availability.
3) The setting is only possible via software configuration.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 29

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Further topics
• "Minimum distance from reflective surfaces", page 33
• "Minimum distance to identical systems", page 39
• "Transmitting power adjustment", page 38
• "Using a sender with a small scanning range", page 39

4.3.2 Minimum distance of the safety light curtain to the hazardous point
Overview
A minimum distance must be maintained between the safety light curtain and the
hazardous point. This distance is required to prevent a person or part of their body from
reaching the hazardous point before the end of the machine’s dangerous state.

Calculating the minimum distance according to ISO 13855:2010

The calculation of the minimum distance is based on international or national stand‐
ards and statutory requirements applicable at the place of installation of the machine.
If the minimum distance is calculated according to ISO 13855:2010, it depends on the
following points:
• Machine stopping time (time interval between triggering the sensor function and
the end of the machine’s dangerous state)
• Response time of the protective device
• Reach or approach speed of the person
• Resolution (detection capability) of the safety light curtain
• Type of approach: orthogonal (at right angles) or parallel
• Parameters specified based on the application
For the USA (scope of OSHA and ANSI), different regulations may apply, e.g.:
a) Laws: Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 (CFR 29), Part 1910.217
b) Standards: ANSI B11.19

Complementary information
If you use the inputs for safety sensors (SDI) on the DMM4 extension module for
an additional protective device, you must calculate an appropriate minimum distance
for the protective device used and take into account the response time for SDI. The
information in this section only applies to the safety light curtain.
Additional information is available in the ISO 13855:2010 standard and in the Guide
for Safe Machinery.
Please note that an individual effects analysis must be carried out in case of any
deviations from ISO 13855:2010.
SICK offers a stopping/run-down time measurement service in many countries.

Further topics
• "Response time", page 194

30 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

4.3.2.1 Calculating the minimum distance of the safety light curtain to the hazardous point
Important information

DANGER
Minimum distance from the hazardous point is too small
The dangerous state of the machine may not be stopped or not be stopped in a timely
manner due to a minimum distance that is too small.
► Calculate the minimum distances for the machine in which the safety light curtain
is integrated.
► When mounting the safety light curtain, observe the minimum distance.

NOTE
If the safety light curtain is configured with a reduced resolution, then the minimum
distance must be calculated according to the effective resolution in accordance with
ISO 13855:2010.
If the effective resolution is > 40 mm, a different formula may have to be used for the
calculation of the minimum distance.

NOTE
If the Smart Box Detection function is configured on the safety light curtain, then a
different formula must be used to calculate the minimum distance, see "Minimum
distance to the hazardous point with Smart Box Detection", page 64.

Procedure
The example shows the calculation of the minimum distance in accordance with
ISO 13855:2010 for an orthogonal (right-angled) approach to the protective field. A
different calculation may be required depending on the application and the ambient
conditions (e.g., for a protective field parallel to or at any angle to the direction of
approach or an indirect approach).
1. First, calculate S using the following formula:
S = (K × T) + 8 × (d – 14 mm)
Where:
° S = Minimum distance in millimeters (mm)
° K = Approach speed (walking and/or gripping speed) of a person or a body
part (mm/s), e.g., 2,000 mm/s
° T = Machine stopping time + response time of the safety light curtain after
interruption in the light path in seconds (s)
° d = Resolution of the safety light curtain in millimeters (mm)
2. If the result S is ≤ 500 mm, then use the determined value as the minimum
distance.
3. If the result S is > 500 mm, then recalculate S with an approach speed of 1,600
mm/s as follows:
S = 1,600 mm/s × T +8 × (d – 14 mm)
4. If the new value S is > 500 mm, then use the newly determined value as the
minimum distance.
5. If the new value S is ≤ 500 mm, then use 500 mm.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 31

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

"

Figure 12: Minimum distance to the hazardous point for orthogonal (rectangular) approach to the
protective field
1 Protective field height
2 Hazardous point
3 Depending on the application and distance, persons must be prevented from standing
behind the protective device.

Example calculation
Machine stopping time = 290 ms
Response time after interruption of the light path = 30 ms
Resolution of the safety light curtain = 14 mm
T = 290 ms + 30 ms = 320 ms = 0.32 s
S = 2,000 mm/s × 0.32 s + 8 × (14 mm – 14 mm) = 640 mm
S > 500 mm, therefore:
S = 1,600 mm/s × 0.32 s + 8 × (14 mm – 14 mm) = 512 mm

4.3.2.2 Taking reach over into account

In accordance with ISO 13855:2010, it must not be possible to defeat the ESPE. If
access to the hazardous area by reaching over a protective field cannot be prevented,
the height of the protective field and minimum distance of the ESPE must be deter‐
mined. This is done by comparing the calculated values based on the possible detec‐
tion of limbs or body parts with the values resulting from reaching over the protective
field. The greater value resulting from this comparison must be used.

32 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Figure 13: Representation of the accessibility of ESPE by reaching over. Left: Protective field that
cannot be reached over. Right: Protective field that can be reached over.

4.3.3 Minimum distance from reflective surfaces

Overview
The light beams from the sender may be deflected by reflective surfaces and dispersive
media. This can prevent an object from being detected.
Therefore, all reflective surfaces and objects (e.g., material bins, machine table, etc.)
must maintain a minimum distance (a) from the protective field. This minimum dis‐
tance (a) must be maintained on all sides of the protective field. This applies in
horizontal, vertical and diagonal directions as well as at the end of the safety light
curtain. The same area must be free of dispersive media (e.g., dust, fog, or smoke).
The minimum distance (a) depends on the distance (D) between sender and receiver
(protective field width).
The weld spark guard can influence the optical properties of the safety light curtain,
meaning that reflective surfaces have to observe a larger minimum distance.

s r

Figure 14: Minimum distance from reflective surfaces

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 33

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Reflective surfaces and dispersive media can prevent persons or parts of the body to
be protected from being properly reflected and therefore, they remain undetected.
► Make sure that all reflective surfaces and objects maintain a minimum distance
from the protective field.
► Ensure that no reflective objects are in the protective field.
► Make sure that no dispersive media (e.g., dust, fog, or smoke) are within the
calculated minimum distance from the protective field.
► Ensure that the correct formula is used for the calculation of the minimum dis‐
tance.
► Ensure that the minimum distance to reflective surfaces is recalculated after a
change in the maximum protective field width or the transmitting power.

Determining minimum distance from reflective surfaces with automatic calibration of

the protective field width
The minimum distance can be determined as follows:
► Determine the distance between the sender and receiver D in meters (m).
► Read the minimum distance a in millimeters (mm) from the graph or calculate
it using the respective formula to determine the minimum distance to reflective
surfaces:

a/mm
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 D/m
Figure 15: Graph of minimum distance from reflective surfaces

Table 18: Formula for calculating the minimum distance to reflective surfaces with automatic
calibration of the protective field width
Distance D between sender and Calculation of the minimum distance (a) to reflective
receiver in m surfaces in mm
D≤3m a = 131 mm
D>3m a = tan (2.5°) × 1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66 × 1 mm/m ×
D

Determining the minimum distance to reflective surfaces when manually setting the
protective field width
The minimum distance can be determined as follows:
► Determine the distance between the sender and receiver D in meters (m).
► Take into consideration the resulting range for the protective field width.
► Calculate the minimum distance a in millimeters (mm) using the relevant formula.

34 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

The resulting range for the protective field width depends on the following factors:
• Resolution
• Manual adjustment of the protective field width
• Transmitting power
Table 19: Formula for calculating the minimum distance to reflective surfaces when manually
setting the protective field width (resolution 14 mm)
Configuration Resulting range Distance D Calculation of the mini‐
for the protective between sender mum distance (a) to reflec‐
field width and receiver in m tive surfaces in mm
Very small range with 0.15 m ... 1.4 m a = 131 mm
reduced transmitting power
Small range with reduced 0.15 m ... 2 m a = 131 mm
transmitting power
Very small range with full 0.15 m ... 2.8 m a = 131 mm
transmitting power
Small range with full trans‐ 0.15 m ... 4 m D≤3m a = 131 mm
mitting power
D>3m a = tan (2.5°) ×
Medium range with 1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
reduced transmitting power × 1 mm/m × D
Medium range with full 1 m ... 8 m D≤4m a = 175 mm
transmitting power
D>4m a = tan (2.5°) ×
Large range with reduced 1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
transmitting power × 1 mm/m × D
Large range with full trans‐ 2 m ... 16 m D≤8m a = 350 mm
mitting power
D>8m a = tan (2.5°) ×
1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
× 1 mm/m × D

Table 20: Formula for calculating the minimum distance to reflective surfaces when manually
setting the protective field width (resolution 30 mm)
Configuration Resulting range Distance D Calculation of the mini‐
for the protective between sender mum distance (a) to reflec‐
field width and receiver in m tive surfaces in mm
Very small range with 0 m ... 2.1 m a = 131 mm
reduced transmitting power
Small range with reduced 0 m ... 3 m a = 131 mm
transmitting power
Very small range with full 0 m ... 4.2 m D≤3m a = 131 mm
transmitting power
D>3m a = tan (2.5°) ×
1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
× 1 mm/m × D
Small range with full trans‐ 0 m ... 6 m D≤3m a = 131 mm
mitting power
D>3m a = tan (2.5°) ×
Medium range with 1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
reduced transmitting power × 1 mm/m × D
Medium range with full 0 m ... 12 m D≤6m a = 262 mm
transmitting power
D>6m a = tan (2.5°) ×
Large range with reduced 1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
transmitting power × 1 mm/m × D
Large range with full trans‐ 0 m ... 24 m D ≤ 12 m a = 524 mm
mitting power
D > 12 m a = tan (2.5°) ×
1,000 mm/m × D = 43.66
× 1 mm/m × D

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 35

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Further topics
• "Weld spark guard", page 207

4.3.4 Protection against interference from systems in close proximity to each other
Overview

s r
s r
2

Figure 16: Preventing mutual interference of system 1 and system 2

The infrared light beams of the sender of system 1 can interfere with the receiver of
system 2. This can disrupt the protective function of system 2. This would mean that
the operator is at risk.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The integrated laser alignment aid may influence the receiver of an ESPE in close
proximity. In such cases, the neighboring ESPE may not detect persons or parts of the
body that require protection.
► Perform an alignment or take other measures to ensure that the laser beam only
hits the front screen of the relevant receiver. The laser beam must not hit any
external receiver should the integrated laser alignment aid be switched on by
mistake or due to a fault. An external receiver is a receiver that is not part of the
same ESPE or same cascade.
► During alignment in particular, make sure that the laser beam does not hit any
external receiver.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Systems of electro-sensitive protective devices (ESPE) that operate in close proximity to
each other can mutually interfere with each other.
► Use suitable measures to prevent interference between systems in close proximity
to each other.

Preventing interference between systems in close proximity to each other

The following measures prevent interference from systems in close proximity:
• Different beam coding for neighboring systems
• Reversed direction of transmission for neighboring systems
• Manual adjustment of the protective field width
• Reduced transmitting power (or sender with small scanning range)
• Optically opaque partitions

36 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Further topics
• "Using beam coding", page 37
• "Using reversed direction of transmission", page 38
• "Using a sender with a small scanning range", page 39

4.3.4.1 Using beam coding

Overview
Depending on the configuration, the ESPE operates with 1 of 3 beam codings:
Uncoded, code 1 or code 2. Uncoded beam coding enables particularly short response
times, but offers no protection against interference from nearby systems. To avoid
mutual interference between two neighboring systems, one can be operated with
code 1 and the other with code 2.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
A system with the Uncoded beam coding can be influenced by senders with code 1 or
code 2.
A system with code 1 or code 2 can be influenced by senders with the Uncoded beam
coding.
Systems with the same beam coding can mutually interfere with each other.
► If systems are in close proximity to each other, only use code 1 and code 2.

Using beam coding

Use suitable beam codings to prevent mutual interference from neighboring systems.
► Configure one system with code 1 and the other system with code 2.

Code 1
s r
Code 2
s r

Figure 17: Trouble-free operation due to beam coding

In the figure, the beam coding of systems in close proximity to each other is different.
This means that the systems do not influence each other.

Complementary information
Coded systems of the following products do not interfere with each other:
• deTec4
• deTem4
• deTem4 A/P
• C4000
• M4000
In the case of systems in close proximity that are of a different product group, different
measures must be taken to prevent mutual interference.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 37

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Further topics
• "Configuring beam coding", page 117
• "Combining beam coding and reversed direction of transmission", page 38

4.3.4.2 Using reversed direction of transmission

Using reversed direction of transmission
The direction of transmission of the system 2 can be changed during mounting by
switching the positions of the sender and receiver. With reversed direction of mounting,
the receiver 2 is not affected by the infrared light from the sender 1.

s r
r s
2
Figure 18: Trouble-free operation due to reversed direction of transmission of system 1 and
system 2

Further topics
• "Combining beam coding and reversed direction of transmission", page 38

4.3.4.3 Combining beam coding and reversed direction of transmission

To prevent a mutual interference in the case of more than two neighboring systems,
beam coding and reversed direction of transmission can be combined.

Code 1 Code 2
s r s r
r s r s
Code 1 Code 2

Figure 19: Trouble-free operation of 4 neighboring systems due to beam coding and reversed
direction of transmission

In the figure, the beam coding of the systems arranged next to each other is different.
The direction of transmission of the systems arranged on top of each other is reversed.
This ensures the systems do not mutually interfere with each other.

4.3.4.4 Transmitting power adjustment

Overview
You can manually adjust the power of the sender.

38 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

The following settings are possible:

• Full transmitting power
• Reduced transmitting power
You can use the reduced transmitting power to reduce the interference of systems in
close proximity to each other.
The reduced transmitting power is only possible if the protective field width is set
manually. Only the full transmitting power can be used for automatic calibration of the
protective field width.

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration
• For the reduced transmitting power: Manual setting of the protective field width

4.3.4.5 Using a sender with a small scanning range

Overview
To prevent mutual interference of systems arranged in a row, a sender with a small
scanning range can be used. A sender with a small scanning range has a reduced
transmitting power as the factory setting.
A sender with a small scanning range can only be used if the protective field width is
set manually. If the protective field width is calibrated automatically, the sender with a
small scanning range cannot be used.

Prerequisites
• Manual adjustment of the protective field width
• The same sender types must be used in a cascade.

Further topics
• "Manual adjustment of the protective field width", page 28
• "Minimum distance to identical systems", page 39
• "Configuring the protective field width", page 120
• "Ordering information", page 204

4.3.4.6 Minimum distance to identical systems

Systems operating in close proximity to each other can mutually interfere with each
other. If interference cannot be prevented by suitable measures, e.g., by using different
beam coding or opaque partitions, a sufficient distance must be maintained between
systems.
For identically configured systems in the same sender direction, the minimum distance
for interference-free operation is defined as follows: The minimum distance B between
the sender of a first system and the receiver of an identically configured second system
is three times the maximum possible protective field width.
Identically configured means:
• Identical resolution
• Identical beam coding
• Identical setting for the protective field width (automatic calibration of the protec‐
tive field width or identical range with manual setting of the protective field width)
• Identical transmitting power

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 39

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

s r s r
1 2
Figure 20: Trouble-free operation with sufficient distance

1 System 1
2 System 2
B Minimum distance between sender of the first system and identically configured receiver
of the second system with the same direction of transmission

4.3.5 Reduced resolution

Overview
With a reduced resolution, objects of a defined size can move within the detection
range of the protective device without the device responding and the machine being
switched off.
The reduced resolution can be used for suppressing interference objects, if, for
instance, cables or hoses need to be routed through the protective field.

Important information

NOTE
If the safety light curtain is configured with a reduced resolution, then the minimum
distance must be calculated according to the effective resolution in accordance with
ISO 13855:2010.
If the effective resolution is > 40 mm, a different formula may have to be used for the
calculation of the minimum distance.

NOTE
If the safety light curtain is configured with a reduced resolution, it must be ensured
that persons are reliably detected in the protective field.

NOTE
If a reduced resolution and automatic calibration of the protective field width is config‐
ured, no objects can be in the protective field upon activation. Otherwise, this may
influence the automatic calibration of the protective field width.

NOTE
When reduced resolution is configured, the effective resolution must be marked on the
device and on the machine by taking suitable measures, e.g. a mark or an information
label provided by SICK. The information label is available as an accessory.

NOTE
If reduced resolution and Smart Box Detection are configured, different effective res‐
olutions apply to the safety light curtain, see "Effective resolution with Smart Box
Detection", page 65.

40 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Further topics
• "Minimum distance of the safety light curtain to the hazardous point", page 30
• "Minimum distance from reflective surfaces", page 33
• "Additional accessories", page 217

4.3.5.1 Reduced resolution (Basic)

Overview
With a reduced resolution, adjacent light beams can be interrupted without the OSSDs
switching to the OFF state.
As a result, smaller objects can move into the detection zone of the safety light curtain
without the curtain responding and the machine switching off.
The reduced resolution affects the entire protective field.
The number of ignored objects in the protective field is not limited by the reduced
resolution.

Prerequisites
• Function package SP2 or DMM4

Effective resolution with reduced resolution (Basic)

The effective resolution of the safety light curtain changes due to the reduced resolu‐
tion. Objects up to a certain height can move in the detection zone of the safety light
curtain without the remaining beams being interrupted and the machine switching off.
Table 21: Effective resolution with reduced resolution (Basic)
Physical resolution Reduction Effective resolution Maximum size of
moving objects
14 mm 1 beam 24 mm 10 mm
2 beams 34 mm 20 mm
30 mm 1 beam 55 mm 25 mm
2 beams 80 mm 50 mm

Further topics
• "Minimum distance of the safety light curtain to the hazardous point", page 30
• "Additional accessories", page 217

4.3.6 Muting
Overview
Muting according to IEC 62046 temporarily bypasses the protective action of the pro‐
tective device so that material can be transported to or from a machine or system. As a
result, the work process remains uninterrupted.
The distinction between people and materials is made by at least 2 signals that are
independent of each other. Based on the logical evaluation of these signals, the protec‐
tive device is bypassed if a valid muting condition is present. As soon as something
other than material enters the hazardous area, the work process is interrupted.

Prerequisites
• Function package SP2 or DMM4
• Muting may only be activated during the period in which the material to be trans‐
ported (e.g. on a pallet) is blocking access to the hazardous area.
• Muting shall be automatic, i.e., not manual.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 41

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

• Muting must not depend on a single electrical signal.

• Muting must be triggered by at least 2 signals wired independently of each other
(e.g. by muting sensors).
• Muting must not depend entirely on software signals (e.g. from a PLC).
• Muting must be reversed after the material has passed through in order that the
protective device becomes effective again.
• The material to be transported must be detected above a certain length, i.e., an
interruption of the muting signals must not last longer than the configured sensor
gap monitoring.
• Attach muting sensors as appropriate to prevent muting from being unintentionally
triggered by a person or means of transport.

4.3.6.1 Muting sensors

Overview
Muting sensors detect material and supply the signals required by an evaluation unit for
the logical linking.
Muting signals can be generated in the following ways:
• Optical sensors
• Inductive sensors
• Mechanical switches
• Controller signals
When the system is switched on, all muting signals must be deactivated at the same
time, otherwise muting will not be activated.

Arranging muting sensors

The following is to be observed in the arrangement of muting sensors:
• Muting sensors must be arranged so that only the material is detected and not the
means of transport or conveyor (vehicle or pallet).
• Muting sensors must be arranged so that material can pass the ESPE unimpeded,
although persons are safely detected by the ESPE.
• Muting sensors must be arranged so that they detect the material with a minimum
distance in front of the ESPE. The minimum distance ensures the required proc‐
essing time until muting is activated.
• If both muting signals are present at the extension connection of the receiver and
no muting connector or IO-Link connector is used, the muting sensors must be
arranged so that the signals arrive at the device at different times (at least 50 ms
apart).

4.3.6.2 Muting arms

Overview
The muting sensors can be mounted on muting arms.
Depending on the variant, a maximum of 2 muting sensors can be mounted on one
muting arm.

Further topics
• "Muting accessories", page 215

42 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

4.3.6.3 Muting variants

4.3.6.3.1 Cross muting

Overview
For muting using a crossed arrangement of the muting sensors, material can move
either from left to right or from right to left, i.e., material flow is possible in both
directions.

Arrangement of the muting sensors

► Place the crossing point of the muting sensors directly on the path of the beams of
the ESPE.
► If this is not possible, place the crossing point in the direction of the hazardous
area.
The muting sensor signals can be present at the following inputs:
• In1 and In2 on the extension connection of the receiver (or via the muting connec‐
tor or IO-Link connector on the extension connection)
• In2 at the extension connection of the receiver and In4 at the M12, 8-pin system
connection
• In5 at the A1 connection and In6 at the A2 connection of the DMM4 extension
module
The muting sensor signals can only ever be present at exactly one of the possible
connection combinations.

Functionality
Once muting sensors A1 and A2 are actuated, muting is active.
Muting remains active until one of the muting sensors becomes clear. When configured
via Safety Designer, muting can also be deactivated when the ESPE becomes free.
L2 1

L1

A1

2
A2
L3

3
Figure 21: Cross muting
1 Hazardous area
2 Crossing point for the muting sensors
3 ESPE

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 43

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Calculate minimum distance

Minimum distance when connecting the muting sensors to the receiver (without mut‐
ing connector or IO-Link connector):
• L1≥ v × 0.060 s
Minimum distance when connecting the muting sensors to the receiver (with muting
connector or IO-Link connector):
• L1≥ v × 0.122 s
Minimum distance when connecting the muting sensors to the DMM4 extension
module:
• L1≥ v × 0.100 s
Where:
• L1 = Distance between the light beams of the ESPE and the detection of the
muting sensors in m
• v = Speed of the material (e.g., material on a conveyor belt in m/s)
Further topics
• "Data sheet", page 189
• "Cross-circuit monitoring", page 52
• "Muting end by ESPE", page 50

4.3.6.3.2 Exit monitoring

Overview
Exit monitoring checks that only material moves out of the hazardous area, while
persons cannot enter the dangerous area.

Arrangement of the muting sensors

The muting sensors must be arranged in such a way that only the material is detected
and not the transport or conveying aid (vehicle or pallet). The entire length of the
material must be detected by the sensors or the ESPE. There may not be any detectable
gaps, otherwise muting is ended too soon (reduced system availability). To increase the
availability of the system, any gaps present until the time set for sensor gap monitoring
are ignored.
► Position muting sensors on the side of the hazardous area.

NOTE
Prevent mutual sensor interference.

The muting sensor signals can be present at the following inputs:

• In1 and In2 on the extension connection of the receiver (or via the muting connec‐
tor or IO-Link connector on the extension connection)
• In2 at the extension connection of the receiver and In4 at the M12, 8-pin system
connection
• In5 at the A1 connection and In6 at the A2 connection of the DMM4 extension
module
The muting sensor signals can only ever be present at exactly one of the possible
connection combinations.

Functionality
The muting sensors (A1 and A2) are arranged serially in the hazardous area and detect
material before it passes through the ESPE 2.
Once muting sensors A1 and A2 are actuated, muting is active.

44 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

A1 A2
2
L1

L2

Figure 22: Exit monitoring

1 Hazardous area
2 ESPE

Calculate minimum distance

Minimum distance when connecting the muting sensors to the receiver (without mut‐
ing connector or IO-Link connector):
• L1 ≥ v × 0.060 s
• v × t > L2
Minimum distance when connecting the muting sensors to the receiver (with muting
connector or IO-Link connector):
• L1 ≥ v × 0.122 s
• v × t > L2
Minimum distance when connecting the muting sensors to the DMM4 extension
module:
• L1 ≥ v × 0.100 s
• v × t > L2
Where:
• L1 = Distance between the light beams of the ESPE and the detection of the
muting sensor A2 in m; L1 < 0.2 m
• v = Speed of the material (e.g. of the conveyor belt) in m/s
• t = Muting hold time in s
• L2 = Distance between the light beams of the ESPE and the detection of the
muting sensor A1 in m

Complementary information
For exit monitoring, the Muting end by ESPE function should be used. The function is
activated automatically when configuring via the SP2 system plug. If the Muting end by
ESPE function cannot be used reliably, the total muting time should be monitored.

Further topics
• "Cross-circuit monitoring", page 52
• "Data sheet", page 189

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 45

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

4.3.6.3.3 Entry/exit monitoring

Overview
When using entry/exit monitoring, materials can be transported both out of a hazard‐
ous area and into a hazardous area without interrupting the work process. As soon
as something other than material enters the hazardous area, the work process is
interrupted.
The muting sensors can be arranged for serial or parallel entry/exit monitoring.

NOTE
If the muting sensors are arranged in parallel, sequence detection must not be config‐
ured. This reduces the availability of the system.

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration

Arrangement of the muting sensors

The muting sensors must be arranged in such a way that only the material is detected
and not the transport or conveying aid (vehicle or pallet). The entire length of the
material must be detected by the sensors or the ESPE. There cannot be any detectable
gaps, otherwise muting is ended too soon (reduced system availability).
Alternatively, sensor gap monitoring can be configured to increase the availability of the
system.

NOTE
Prevent mutual sensor interference.

The muting sensor signals are present at the following inputs:

• In5 on the A1 connection of the DMM4 extension module
• In6 on the A2 connection of the DMM4 extension module
• In7 on the B1 connection of the DMM4 extension module
• In8 on the B2 connection of the DMM4 extension module
Functionality
The muting sensors are arranged in series or in parallel on the left and right of the
ESPE and detect the material before it passes through the ESPE (2). The material can
be transported either into the hazardous area (1) or out of the hazardous area.
When the sensors are arranged in parallel, the position of the muting sensors is also
used to monitor the width of the permissible object. The objects must always pass the
muting sensors with the same width. Optical pushbuttons and all types of non-optical
sensors can be used in this arrangement. Use sensors and sensing devices with
background suppression.

46 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

L3 1 2

A1 A2 B1 B2

L1

L2

Figure 23: Serial arrangement of the muting sensors

1 ESPE
2 Hazardous area

L3 1 2
A1 B1

A2 B2

L1

Figure 24: Parallel arrangement of the muting sensors

1 ESPE
2 Hazardous area

Table 22: Conditions for entry/exit monitoring

Condition Description
A1 & A2 (or B1 & B2) Two muting sensors of a muting sensor pair
are activated to start muting. The first muting
sensor pair is activated according to the direc‐
tion in which the material is being transported.
A1 & A2 & B1 & B2 All four muting sensors are activated briefly to
accept the muting condition.
B1 & B2 (or A1 & A2) Muting applies for as long as this condition
remains fulfilled. The second muting sensor
pair is activated according to the direction in
which the material is being transported.

Calculate minimum distance

L1 ≥ v × 2 x 0.100 s

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 47

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

L2 < L3
Where:
• L1 = Distance of the inner muting sensors (arrangement symmetrical to the light
beams of the ESPE) in m; L1 < 0.4 m (2 x 0.2 m)
• v = Speed of the material (e.g. of the conveyor belt) in m/s
• L2 = Distance of the outer muting sensors (arrangement symmetrical to the light
beams of the ESPE) in m; L2 – L1 > 0.5 m (2 x 0.25 m)
• L3 = Length of the material in conveying direction in m

4.3.6.4 Override
Overview
An override is a manual muting triggering after an error in the muting conditions. The
protective device is bypassed and the system can be cleared and an error-free status
can be achieved.
When configuring via the SP2 system plug, override is always active if muting has been
configured. The signal for override is then present at the In3 connection.
When configured via Safety Designer, the override signal can be present at one of the
following inputs:
• In2 at the extension connection of the receiver
• In3 at the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In9 or In10 at the X1 connection of the DMM4 extension module
The override signal can only ever be present at exactly one of the possible connections.
In addition, the reset signal can be configured on the In2, In3 or In10 inputs in order to
use the combined reset/override function.

Important information

NOTE
If automatic measurement of the protective field width is configured and the protective
field is interrupted when the ESPE is switched on, the system changes to the override
status if the override conditions are fulfilled. If override is performed, the OSSDs change
to the OFF state again after the protective field frees up again, if necessary, until the
protective field width is automatically measured.
Set the protective field width manually to bypass the behavior.

Prerequisites
• The override control switch is mounted outside of the hazardous area so that it
cannot be actuated by a person that is inside the hazardous area.
• The operator can oversee the entire hazardous area when actuating the control
switch.

Performing an override with the integrated override function

An error occurs while a muting condition is valid. The cause of the error is indicated by
the LEDs on the receiver.
At the same time, the output signal switching devices (OSSDs) switch to the OFF state.
The system is in the override required status and waits for the operator to actuate the
override control switch or for the cause to be remedied, e.g. for the belt to be cleared.

48 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

The override required status is only triggered by the system if the following conditions
are met:
• An error occurs, muting is deactivated or is ended.
• At least one muting signal is active.
• The ESPE is interrupted by an object.
Performing an override
The system is in the override required status after an error. Muting can only continue at
the point where it was interrupted if the operator starts the integrated override function
using the control switch. Then, the output signal switching devices (OSSDs) change to
the ON state and the system monitors the override status.
If the override status is exited and reset is configured, no additional reset sequence is
required provided the switching outputs (OSSDs) are allowed to remain active.
The maximum duration for override is limited by the total muting time.

Monitoring override states

For safety reasons, the number of consecutive override statuses is limited. The system
resets the counter in the following cases:
• After an error-free muting cycle without override
• Each time the system is started
• When resetting muting (change of muting mode, change to OSSD OFF mode, SDI
switch-off)
When configuring via the SP2 system plug, the number of consecutive overrides is set
to 5.
The number of consecutive overrides can be customized via Safety Designer.
If the permitted number of override statuses has been exceeded, the system then
switches to the lockout status and displays an error message.

4.3.6.5 Time monitoring

4.3.6.5.1 Muting hold time

The muting hold time can only be used in combination with the exit monitoring muting
variant.
If one of the muting sensors in the hazardous area becomes free and the sensor gap
monitoring has been exceeded, the muting hold time begins. The protective effect of
the ESPE is bypassed during this period and material or a means of transport can pass
through the ESPE without the machine being stopped.
When configuring via the SP2 system plug, the muting hold time is set to 4 s.
When configuring via Safety Designer, the muting hold time can be customized. The
muting hold time selected should be as short as possible.
Muting is ended when the muting hold time has elapsed.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 49

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

4.3.6.5.2 Muting end by ESPE

Important information

DANGER
Muting end by ESPE delayed or ineffective
If automatic measurement of the protective field width is configured and the protective
field is interrupted when the ESPE is switched on for the first time, the Muting end by
ESPE function is delayed or ineffective.
► Set the protective field width manually.

Functionality
With the Muting end by ESPE function, muting is ended when the ESPE is clear again
(1) and sensor gap monitoring has elapsed. This results in a shorter muting time and
greater safety at the same time.

4 5
1

A1 A2
2
3
Figure 25: Muting ends as soon as the ESPE is clear again (example for exit monitoring)
1 ESPE
2 Time at which muting ends
3 Material
4 Transportation equipment
5 Hazardous area

The following applies to the muting end by ESPE function:

• The entire length of the material and means of transport must be detected by the
muting sensors or the ESPE.
• Muting is ended too early if one of the muting sensors remains clear for longer
than the configured value, i.e., if the sensor gap monitoring has been exceeded.
• If the ESPE is clear, muting is ended after the sensor gap monitoring or a configu‐
rable delay time has elapsed.
• If the light path of the ESPE does not become clear, muting is ended at the
latest once the muting condition is no longer satisfied.

4.3.6.5.3 Sensor gap monitoring

Overview
Sensor gap monitoring allows signals from the muting sensors and the Muting end
by ESPE function to be ignored for a defined period without removing a valid muting
condition.
When configuring via the SP2 system plug, the time for sensor gap monitoring is set to
0.5 s.

50 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

When configuring via Safety Designer, the time for sensor gap monitoring can be
customized.

Sensor gap monitoring (muting sensor)

If a muting sensor briefly becomes clear, i.e., an object gap is detected, the deactivated
muting signal continues to be interpreted as an active signal and muting is maintained.
Muting is only ended if one of the muting sensors is clear for longer than the configured
time period.
The following applies to sensor gap monitoring (muting sensor) for a specific sensor
pair
• Only one of the muting sensors may be clear (deactivated) briefly. If the 2nd
muting sensor is also clear, muting is ended.
• Muting is ended if one of the muting sensors is clear (deactivated) for longer than
the configured time period.

Sensor gap monitoring (ESPE)

If the ESPE becomes clear for a short time, i.e., an object gap is detected, the clear
ESPE continues to be interpreted as interrupted and muting is maintained.
Muting is only ended if the ESPE is clear for longer than the configured time period.
The following applies to sensor gap monitoring (ESPE):
• Sensor gap monitoring (ESPE) is active in combination with the Muting end by
ESPE function.
• The ESPE is allowed to be clear for a short time, i.e. to detect a short object gap.
• Muting is only ended if the ESPE is clear for longer than the configured time
period.

4.3.6.5.4 Concurrence monitoring

Overview
Concurrence monitoring can be used to improve the protection against manipulation of
the safety application (e.g., covering an optical sensor).
When configuring via the SP2 system plug, the duration for concurrence monitoring is
set to 24 hours.
When configuring via Safety Designer, the duration of concurrence monitoring can be
customized.

Functionality
Concurrence monitoring checks whether both muting sensors are actuated during the
configured time period. If a muting signal does not appear within this period, muting is
not triggered. Muting can only be triggered again if all muting sensors are clear.

NOTE
When configuring via Safety Designer, concurrence monitoring can be deactivated if a
muting cycle of more than 24 hours is required.
The system is then unable to detect external errors.
The resulting risk must be assessed. Suitable measures must be defined (e.g., config‐
uring Muting end by ESPE).

4.3.6.5.5 Total muting time

The total muting time limits the maximum duration of muting and override, i.e., muting
and override then end at the latest once the total muting time has elapsed.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 51

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

When configuring via the SP2 system plug, the total muting time is set to 24 hours.
When configuring via Safety Designer, the total muting time can be customized.

NOTE
When configuring via Safety Designer, the total muting time can be deactivated if a
muting cycle of more than 24 hours is required.
The system is then unable to detect external errors.
The resulting risk must be assessed. Suitable measures must be defined (e.g., config‐
uring Muting end by ESPE).

4.3.6.5.6 Cross-circuit monitoring

Overview
If both muting signals are connected to the extension connection of the receiver, the
muting signal inputs are monitored for cross-circuits.
The device expects the muting signals to arrive at different times. If the muting signals
are detected simultaneously by the device, the OSSDs switch to the OFF state.
► Arrange the muting sensors so that the muting signals arrive at the device at
different times (at least 50 ms apart).

Important information

NOTE
If a muting connector or IO-Link connector is used or one signal is on the system
connection and the 2nd signal on the extension connection, the muting sensors do not
have to be arranged with an offset.

Further topics
• "Accessories", page 207

4.3.6.6 Direction detection and sequence monitoring

Overview
The conditions for muting can be further restricted using direction detection or
sequence monitoring. You can define the direction or the sequence in which the muting
sensors must be triggered.
When direction detection is activated, a sensor pair must respond in a specific
sequence and be released again. The material can only pass through the protective
device in one direction. The sequence of the sensors within a sensor pair is not
relevant.
When sequence monitoring is activated, the sensors must respond in a specific
sequence and be released again. The material must pass through the protective device
completely so that no muting error occurs. The direction can also be defined by config‐
uring the direction detection.

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration

52 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Complementary information
Direction detection or sequence monitoring can be activated for the entry/exit moni‐
toring function:
• Import/exit monitoring (four muting sensors A1, A2, B1, B2)
Possible conditions for direction detection
• The A sensors must be activated before the B sensors.
• The B sensors must be activated before the A sensors.
Possible conditions for sequence monitoring
• A1 → A2 → B1 → B2 or B2 → B1 → A2 → A1 (both directions allowed)
• A1 → A2 → B1 → B2
• B2 → B1 → A2 → A1
Direction or sequence monitoring cannot be used for cross-muting or exit monitoring.
Sequence monitoring cannot be configured for entry/exit monitoring if the muting
sensors are arranged in parallel.
Muting is deactivated if direction detection is configured but the muting sensors are not
activated according to the configuration.

4.3.6.7 Muting release

Overview
The protective device has an internal muting release. The muting release function can
be configured during commissioning via Safety Designer.
The muting release function is an supplementary signal from an external source that is
only used for muting release and is required for each muting cycle.
The muting release supplementary signal can be a control signal from a PLC or another
sensor, but not a static signal.
When using the supplementary signal for muting release, the safety integrity for muting
must not depend solely on this signal.
The muting release signal can be present at one of the following inputs:
• In1 or In2 on the extension connection of the receiver
• In3 or In4 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In10 at the X1 connection or In12 at the X2 connection of the DMM4 extension
module
The muting release signal can only ever be present at exactly one of the possible
inputs.
For non-safety-related use of the Muting release function, this can also be controlled via
IO-Link.

Prerequisites
• Software configuration

Functionality
For each muting object, the system checks whether there is a valid condition for the
supplementary signal at the input of the supplementary signal:
Requirements for a valid condition:
• Signal change from LOW to HIGH at the input of the supplementary signal for each
valid muting object on a sensor pair AND
• Supplementary signal HIGH when the relevant muting signal changes from LOW to
HIGH

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 53

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

If sequence monitoring is configured, the relevant muting signal is the one that is active
first (A1 or B2). Otherwise the muting signal that activates muting (both muting signals
of a sensor pair active).
As soon as an object is detected by the muting sensors of the first muting sensor pair
without a valid condition of the supplementary signal for muting release, muting is not
triggered.
To ensure the detection of a valid muting release, the following minimum time must be
observed between the LOW to HIGH signal change of the muting release supplementary
signal and the LOW to HIGH signal change of the relevant muting sensor:
• Input for supplementary signal on receiver: 5 ms
• Input for supplementary signal on DMM4 extension module: 50 ms
• Input for supplementary signal via IO-Link: 0 ms
The valid condition for muting release is required for each muting object.
For the entry/exit monitoring muting variant, the muting release supplementary signal
can also be configured for muting from one direction of the conveyor belt only.

1
A1

A2

B1

B2

Muting

t
3
2 4
Figure 26: Signal sequence with configured supplementary signal during a muting cycle (example
for entry/exit monitoring)
1 Supplementary signal
2 Start muting cycle
3 Acceptance
4 End muting cycle

4.3.6.8 Partial muting

Overview
The partial muting function can be used to increase safety by keeping defined light
beams active when the muting condition is valid.
When configuring partial muting via the SP2 system plug, the upper light beam (far
from system plug) remains active by default. All other light beams are temporarily
bypassed. As soon as the active light beam is interrupted, the OSSDs switch to the OFF
state.
When configuring via Safety Designer, you can define individually for each light beam
whether it remains active for the partial muting function (e.g., for a certain object
height). As soon as an active light beam is interrupted, the OSSDs switch to the OFF
state.

54 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Figure 27: Partial muting

1 Active beam
2 Deactivated beams

Complementary information
• Even if partial muting is configured, the active light beam can be bypassed by
override.
• Partial muting cannot be combined with a reduced resolution.
• Different muting modes with different settings can be configured using the operat‐
ing mode selection.
• The system can switch between muting and partial muting via an external signal.

4.3.6.9 Switching from partial muting to muting

Overview
You can switch between partial muting and muting during operation using a supplemen‐
tary signal.
Switching can be useful if certain beams cannot remain permanently active, e.g., if the
height of the material varies. Switching from partial muting to muting does not interrupt
the material flow.
The supplementary signal required for the switchover can be generated by a PLC or
another sensor.
When using the supplementary signal for switching from partial muting to muting, the
safety integrity for muting must not depend solely on this signal.
The supplementary signal for switching from partial muting to muting can be present at
one of the following inputs:
• In1 or In2 on the extension connection of the receiver
• In3 or In4 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In10 at the X1 connection or In12 at the X2 connection of the DMM4 extension
module
The supplementary signal for switching from partial muting to muting can only ever be
present at exactly one of the possible inputs.
For non-safety-related use of the Switching between partial muting and muting function,
this can also be controlled via IO-Link.

Prerequisites
• Partial muting
• Software configuration

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 55

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Functionality
For each muting object, the system checks whether there is a valid condition for
switching at the input of the supplementary signal:
Requirements for a valid condition:
• Signal change from LOW to HIGH at the input of the supplementary signal for each
valid muting object on a sensor pair AND
• Supplementary signal HIGH when the relevant muting signal changes from LOW to
HIGH
If sequence monitoring is configured, the relevant muting signal is the one that is active
first (A1 or B2). Otherwise the muting signal that activates muting (both muting signals
of a sensor pair active).
As soon as an object is detected by the muting sensors of the first muting sensor pair
without a valid condition of the supplementary signal for muting release, the switchover
to muting is not triggered and partial muting remains active.
To ensure the detection of a valid switchover, the following minimum time must be
observed between the LOW to HIGH signal change of the switchover supplementary
signal and the LOW to HIGH signal change of the relevant muting sensor:
• Input for supplementary signal on receiver: 5 ms
• Input for supplementary signal on DMM4 extension module: 50 ms
• Input for supplementary signal via IO-Link: 0 ms
The valid condition for switching from partial muting to muting is required for each
muting object. Muting must be deactivated to perform a switchover, otherwise muting is
ended.
For the entry/exit monitoring muting variant, the switchover from partial muting to
muting can also be configured for muting from one direction of the conveyor belt only.

1
A1

A2

B1

B2

Muting

t
3
2 4
Figure 28: Signal sequence with configured supplementary signal during a muting cycle (example
for entry/exit monitoring)
1 Supplementary signal
2 Start muting cycle
3 Acceptance
4 End muting cycle

56 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

4.3.6.10 Belt stop

Overview
The belt stop function pauses several muting-related time monitors when a conveyor
belt stop is detected. This prevents a valid muting condition from being ended due to
a timeout if the conveyor belt and therefore the muting object are at a standstill. The
following time monitors are paused:
• Total muting time
• Concurrence monitoring
• Muting hold time
The belt stop function has no affect, however, on the configured values for the time
monitors.
The belt stop signal can be present at one of the following inputs:
• In3 or In4 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In17 at the M12, 8-pin system connection (only available when an extension
module is connected)
The belt stop signal can only ever be present at exactly one of the possible inputs.

NOTE
If the belt stop signal is present at In17 of the extension module, the belt stop signal
and the following signals must not be active at the same time:
• In3: Reset, override, muting release supplementary signal, and switchover from
partial muting to muting
• In4: Muting signal 1, muting release supplementary signal, and switchover from
partial muting to muting
A time delay of at least 50 ms between the activation of the signals must be ensured.

For a non-safety-related use of the belt stop function, this can also be controlled via
IO-Link.
The belt stop function is available for the muting and override functions.

Prerequisites
• Software configuration

Functionality
When the conveyor belt is stopped, the signal at the belt stop input changes from HIGH
to LOW. Active muting-related time monitors are paused until the conveyor belt starts up
again and a signal change from LOW to HIGH occurs. This also applies to override and
the associated time monitors.
Table 23: Input signals from bandstop
Belt stop input State
HIGH Conveyor belt running, muting-related time
monitors active
LOW Conveyor belt stationary:

• The muting-related time monitors are stop‐

ped.
AND

• The last status of the active muting sensors

and the ESPE is monitored.

When the conveyor belt is stopped, the following signals are monitored for changes:

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 57

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

• Muting signals A1 and A2 (only if muting signals are active)

• Muting signals B1 and B2 (only if entry/exit monitoring is configured and muting
signals are active)
• Status of the protective field (taking into account reduced resolution)
If a change in the monitored signals is detected, muting is ended.
The monitoring of the signals starts a configurable time after the signal change from
HIGH to LOW at the belt stop input.
If monitoring of the signals is active after the conveyor belt has stopped and a muting
condition occurs at both sensors, muting is only activated when the conveyor belt starts
up again and the muting conditions are still active.

Muting end during belt stop

If muting was ended due to an interruption of the protective field while the conveyor
belt is stationary, the system can reactivate muting if the following conditions are met:
• While the system is in the reset required status, a valid reset sequence is recog‐
nized.
• The protective field is clear.
• The muting conditions are met.
• The monitored muting signals are unchanged.

4.3.6.11 Operating modes for muting

Overview
You can use the Safety Designer configuration software to configure different operating
modes with different muting settings. To do this, create at least two standard operating
modes and change the muting settings for each of the standard operating modes.
The following muting settings can be individually configured for each muting mode:
• Muting (activation/deactivation)
• Partial muting (activation/deactivation/different configuration)
• Muting release supplementary signal (activation/deactivation/direction for entry/
exit monitoring)
• Supplementary signal for switching from partial muting to muting (activation/deac‐
tivation/direction for entry/exit monitoring)
• Belt stop (activation/deactivation/start of monitoring after belt stop)
• Muting end condition (different configuration)
• For entry/exit monitoring: direction detection (activation/deactivation/different
configuration)
• For entry/exit monitoring: sequence monitoring (activation/deactivation/different
configuration)
• Muting hold time (for exit monitoring; different configuration)
• Muting end delay (for Muting end by ESPE; activation/deactivation/different con‐
figuration)
• Total muting time (activation/deactivation/different configuration)
• Concurrence monitoring (activation/deactivation/different configuration)
• Sensor gap monitoring (different configuration)
• Override (maximum number of consecutive overrides)
The following muting settings are the same for each muting mode:
• Muting variant
• Override (up to the maximum number of consecutive overrides)

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration

58 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Conditions for changing a muting mode:

The following conditions must be met to switch to a muting mode:
• Muting and override are deactivated.
• All muting signals are deactivated.
The change to a muting mode is only carried out if the conditions for the change have
been met. The conditions can therefore cause the switchover time to a muting mode to
increase.
The mode is changed immediately in the following cases, regardless of the conditions:
• The OSSD OFF or alignment operating mode is switched to a muting operating
mode.
• Monitoring of the maximum switchover time is configured and the maximum time
has elapsed.
• Inputs for safety sensors (SDI) are configured and deactivated and the muting
operating mode is switched.
• After switching on, the system switches to a valid muting operating mode.
Muting is reset when a muting mode is changed. This also applies to all muting sta‐
tuses and monitors. After the muting mode has been changed, a new, complete muting
cycle is required.

Additional time for muting

When calculating the total time for an operating mode change, function-dependent
additional times must be taken into account.
The additional time for muting must always be taken into account when switching
between standard operating modes (configurable).
The additional time for muting depends on the response time of the safety light curtain
and the configured multiple sampling:
tOPM_Feat_Add (Muting) = Response time of the safety light curtain / configured multiple
sampling

Further topics
• "Operating mode selection", page 67
• "Calculating the times for an operating mode change", page 70
• "Response time", page 194

4.3.7 Smart Box Detection

Overview
Smart Box Detection enables human-material differentiation by conveying only geomet‐
rically uniform objects to or from a plant or machine.
The protective field always remains active, meaning interruption in the protective
field above an object is reliably detected by the protective device and the dangerous
machine state is stopped.
Smart Box Detection can only be configured on safety light curtains with a 14 mm
resolution.
Smart Box Detection can only be used with the SP2 system plug and configuration via
DIP switches.
Smart Box Detection cannot be configured in combination with the DMM4 extension
module.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 59

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Figure 29: Smart Box Detection application example

Important information

NOTE
Smart Box Detection is only available for receivers with functional scope V 1.1.0 or
higher, see "Version numbers and functional scope", page 188.

Prerequisites
• Function package SP2
• Configuration via system plug
• The objects cast a rectangular shadow without gaps (geometrically uniform
objects) when passing through the protective field.
• The objects do not have a reflective surface.
• The objects must have a defined minimum height and minimum width and main‐
tain a defined minimum distance from each other.
• The object velocity is 0.1 m/s ... 1 m/s.
• The safety light curtain is mounted perpendicular to the conveyor plane for opti‐
mum availability.
• The lower edge of the housing is flush with the transport level.

60 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

• The object blocks access to the hazardous area. Lateral interruption in the protec‐
tive field is not possible.
• Smart Box Detection may only be used in applications where it is ruled out that
people or body parts can be recognized as valid objects, e.g. due to their work
clothes or due to deliberate manipulation of the protective device.

Functionality
The protective device detects objects that cast a rectangular shadow without gaps
when passing through.
If, on the other hand, other objects, especially persons, enter the protective field, the
protective device detects the deviation from a valid object. The dangerous machine
state is stopped.

Figure 30: Left: Rectangular shadow without gaps. Right: Shadow with gaps.

If Smart Box Detection is configured, the protective field always remains active. Inter‐
ruption in the protective field above a valid object is reliably detected by the protective
device and the dangerous machine state is stopped.

4.3.7.1 Object properties

Overview
Smart Box Detection allows geometrically uniform objects to pass through the protec‐
tive field that have a certain minimum size.
Real life objects often have non-straight edges or are damaged, e.g., the transport box
is torn or dented. Smart Box Detection therefore also allows objects whose upper and
lower and lateral object edges are within a certain tolerance zone (increased availability
of the system).
dYbox
dXbox Wbox dXbox

Vbox
hbox

dYbox

Figure 31: Smart Box Detection: Object properties

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 61

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Permitted object properties

Table 24: Permitted object properties
Symbol Name Value
hbox Object height 134 mm … (protective field
height - 54 mm)
wbox Object width min. 10 mm ... 100 mm 1)
dYbox Upper and lower object edge At least 10 mm 2)
tolerance (object height)
dXbox Lateral object edge tolerance min. 6 mm ... 60 mm (uncoded
(object width) 3) system)
min. 4 mm ... 40 mm (coded
system)
vbox Object speed 0.1 m/s … 1 m/s
abox Object distance min. 10 mm … 100 mm1)
1) The values depend on the object speed.
2) The values depend on the reduced resolution.
3) The values depend on the object speed and the set beam coding.

4.3.7.1.1 Object edge tolerance

Overview
Increased availability of the system is possible due to the object edge tolerance.
Objects that have been damaged during transport, for example, can pass through the
protective field despite odd object edges as long as the defined tolerance zones are not
exceeded.

Lateral object edge tolerance

The lateral object edge tolerance is proportional to the object speed. The faster
the object speed (vbox), the greater the lateral object edge tolerance, see figure 32,
page 62 and see figure 33, page 63.
70
60
60 54
48
50 42
40 36
30
30 24
18
20 12
6
10
0
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
vbox (m/sec)

Figure 32: Lateral object edge tolerance for an uncoded system

62 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

45
40
40
36
35 32
30 28
24
25
20
20
16
15 12
10 8
4
5
0
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
vbox (m/sec)

Figure 33: Lateral object edge tolerance for a coded system

Upper and lower object edge tolerance

The upper and lower object edge tolerance depends on the reduced resolution, see
table 25, page 63.
Table 25: Upper and lower object edge tolerance depends on the reduced resolution
Reduced resolution Upper object edge tolerance Lower object edge tol‐
erance
Increasing object Decreasing object
height of the passing height of the passing
object object
Reduced resolution At least 10 mm At least 10 mm At least 10 mm
deactivated
1 beam min. 20 mm At least 10 mm At least 10 mm
2 beams min. 30 mm At least 10 mm At least 10 mm

4.3.7.1.2 Object speed

The object may move through the protective field at a speed of 0.1 m/s ... 1.0 m/s. At
higher speeds, reliable human-material differentiation is not guaranteed.

4.3.7.1.3 Object distance and object width

The objects are reliably detected if a minimum distance of 10 mm ... 100 mm is
maintained between 2 consecutive objects and the objects have a minimum width of
10 mm ... 100 mm. The values depend on the object speed.
120
100
abox (mm) / wbox (mm)

100 90
80
80 70
60
60 50
40
40 30
20
20 10
0
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
vbox (m/sec)

Figure 34: Object distance and object width dependent on object speed

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 63

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

4.3.7.2 Minimum distance to the hazardous point with Smart Box Detection
Overview
The calculation of the minimum distance to the hazardous point with configured Smart
Box Detection depends on the application type.
Application type 1:
° Object exit : Regardless of whether the presence of people on the transport
2)

level can be ruled out.

° Object entry : Presence of people at the transport level can be ruled out.
3)

Application type 2:
° Object entry : Presence of people at the transport level cannot be ruled out.
4)

Calculation of the minimum distance to the hazardous point

The following formulas are available for calculating the minimum distance, depending
on the application:
• Application type 1:
S = (t1 + t2 ) * K + ZSBD
• Application type 2:
S = (t1 + t2 ) * (vbox + K) + ZSBD
Where:
• S = Minimum distance in millimeters (mm)
• t1 = Response time of the protective device in seconds (s)
The response time is 0.08 s (independent of the protective field height and beam
coding).
• t2 = Machine stopping time in seconds (s)
The machine stopping time is to be determined individually, e.g. 0.1 s
• vbox = Object speed (mm/s), 100 mm/s … 1,000 mm/s
• K = Approach speed (walking and/or gripping speed) of a person or body part
(mm/s) (see ISO 13855:2010), e.g., 2,000 mm/s
• ZSBD = Supplement for reliably distinguishing between a valid object and a person
or body part in millimeters (mm), see table 26.

Supplement ZSBD
Supplement ZSBD indicates how far a person or body part can approach the hazardous
area before the protective device is triggered.
The value depends on the application type and the reduced resolution.
Table 26: Supplement ZSBD
Application type Reduced resolution ZSBD
1 Deactivated 128 mm
1 1 beam 208 mm
1 2 beams 850 mm
2 Combination is not allowed 236 mm

Calculation example: Application type 1

The example shows the calculation of the minimum distance for application type 1 (e.g.
object entry, people are ruled out on the transport level) when the reduced resolution is
deactivated.

2) Objects on the transport level move out of the hazardous area.

3) Objects on the transport level move into the hazardous area
4) Objects on the transport level move into the hazardous area.

64 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

• Response time: 0.08 s

• Machine stopping time: 0,1 s
• Approach speed: 2,000 mm/s
• Reduced resolution deactivated
S = (t1 + t2) * K + ZSBD
S = (0.08 s + 0.1 s) * 2,000 mm/s + 128 mm
S = 488 mm

4.3.7.3 Effective resolution with Smart Box Detection

If Smart Box Detection is configured on a single system and the protective field is
clear of objects, the protective device has an effective resolution of 14 mm (reduced
resolution deactivated).
As soon as the protective device detects a valid object, the detection capability of the
free protective field area changes. The detection capability of the protective field area
not covered by an object depends on the configured reduced resolution.

NOTE
Configuration of reduced resolution is only permitted in the framework of application
type 1 5).

Table 27: Effective resolution with Smart Box Detection in combination with reduced resolution
Reduced resolution Effective resolution with free Effective resolution above a
protective field valid object
Reduced resolution deacti‐ 14 mm 30 mm
vated
1 beam 24 mm 40 mm
2 beams 34 mm 50 mm

4.3.7.4 Smart Box Detection Override

Overview
Smart Box Detection Override enables manual bypassing of the protective device after
an invalid object has been detected by the protective device. The system can be
released or an error-free state can be achieved.
Smart Box Detection Override is always active if Smart Box Detection has been config‐
ured.

Important information

DANGER
During Smart Box Detection Override, the protective field is not monitored.
Persons or body parts to be protected may not be detected.
► Prevent access to the hazardous area during execution of Smart Box Detection
Override.

5) Object exit (regardless of whether people can be ruled out on the transport level) or object entry (people can be ruled out on the
transport level)

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 65

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

NOTE
If automatic measurement of the protective field width is configured and the protective
field is interrupted when the ESPE is switched on, the system changes to the override
status if the override conditions are fulfilled. If override is performed, the OSSDs change
to the OFF state again after the protective field frees up again, if necessary, until the
protective field width is automatically measured.
Set the protective field width manually to bypass the behavior.

Prerequisites
• The Smart Box Detection Override control switch is mounted outside of the hazard‐
ous area so that it cannot be actuated by a person that is inside the hazardous
area.
• The operator can oversee the entire hazardous area when actuating the control
switch.

Performing Smart Box Detection Override

When a Smart Box Detection condition is violated, the OSSDs switch to the OFF state.
The Smart Box Detection Override required status is triggered by the system only
when the following conditions apply:
• The protective field is interrupted and the beam status of the protective field
remains the same for 5 s.
• The top light beam is not interrupted.
• The integrated laser alignment aid of the sender is switched off.
If the conditions apply, the system changes to the Smart Box Detection Override
required status. The cause of the error is indicated by the LEDs on the receiver. If
an optional signal lamp is connected, this signal lamp also flashes.
To remove an object from the protective field, you can trigger the integrated Smart
Box Detection Override function via the control switch. This causes the output signal
switching devices (OSSDs) to switch to the ON state. Alternatively, you can eliminate the
cause in another way, e.g., by clearing the belt.
As soon as the protective field is clear, Smart Box Detection Override is ended.
The maximum duration for Smart Box Detection Override is limited by the total time for
Smart Box Detection.

Monitoring override statuses

The number of Smart Box Detection Override statuses is limited to 5. The system resets
the counter in the following cases:
• After an error-free cycle without override
• Each time the system is started
If the permitted number of Smart Box Detection Override statuses has been exceeded,
the system then switches to the locking status and displays an error message.

Complementary information
If reset and Smart Box Detection Override are configured on the same input, both
functions are started using a common control switch.
If the override status is exited and reset is configured, no additional reset is required
provided the OSSDs are allowed to remain active.

66 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

4.3.7.5 Total time for Smart Box Detection

The total time limits the maximum duration for Smart Box Detection and Smart Box
Detection Override to 24 hours, i.e., Smart Box Detection and Smart Box Detection
Override are terminated at the latest when the total time has expired. The system then
changes to the Smart Box Detection Override Required status.
The total time for Smart Box Detection is always active.

4.3.8 Multiple sampling

Overview
The multiple sampling specifies how often an object must be detected before the
protective device responds with a protective field interruption.
By using multiple sampling, you reduce the probability that any wood chips, insects
or welding sparks, for example, located briefly in the protective field will cause the
machine to switch off. This increases the availability of the machine.

NOTICE
The total response time is increased by the multiple sampling. If you change the
multiple sampling, you must recalculate the response time.

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration

Functionality
You can define up to 4 scans for multiple sampling. Multiple sampling with 2 scans is
set as standard.
If an object interrupts the protective field and the configured number of scans is
exceeded, the OSSDs switch to the OFF state.

4.3.9 Operating mode selection

Overview
You can use the operating mode selection function to switch between different operat‐
ing modes during operation. To do this, you can define up to 5 operating modes in the
configuration software that you can switch between during operation.
If operating modes are to be used, at least two operating modes must always be
configured. At least one of the operating modes must be a standard operating mode
(configurable). A maximum of 4 standard operating modes (configurable) can be used.
For safety-related use of the operating mode selection, 3 inputs are available for
connecting an operating mode selector switch to the DMM4 extension module, thereby
allowing you to define up to 3 operating modes.
For non-safety-related use of the Operating mode selection, you can also control the
desired operating mode via IO-Link. When controlling operating modes via IO-Link, you
can define up to 5 operating modes.
For safety-related use of the operating mode selection, check the effects of the planned
operating modes. Depending on the requirements of relevant standards, it may be
necessary to use a key switch to select the operating modes.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 67

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

WARNING
Risk of ineffectiveness of the protective device
If the operating mode selector switch is mounted outside the control cabinet, you must
protect the corresponding connecting cables from short-circuits and cross-circuits, e.g.,
by laying them in suitable cable ducts.

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration

Connection
You can use the following connections to control the change between operating modes:
• Connection X3 on the DMM4 extension module (control via the safety inputs)
• IO-Link connection on the ESPE (control via IO-Link)
Control via the safety inputs and control via IO-Link cannot be combined.
As soon as the X3 connection is used to control an operating mode, all three inputs
on the connection for operating modes are blocked. Even if you only use two operating
modes, you cannot use the third input for other functions.

Input signals for operating mode selection

Table 28: Valid combinations of input signals at connection X3 (safety inputs)
In13 In14 In15 Operating mode
1 0 0 1
0 1 0 2
0 0 1 3

When using IO-Link, the operating mode is transmitted via IO-Link.

Overview of the possible operating modes

You can select the following operating modes:
• Standard operating mode (configurable)
• Alignment mode (predefined)
• OSSD OFF mode (predefined)
You can configure the following functions differently for each standard operating
mode:
• Muting
Functionality
One operating mode for each input used is configured using Safety Designer. The input
signals are permanently monitored.
Tolerance time
• A tolerance time is configured for each signal change used when evaluating the
input signals.
• After an input signal change, a change of operating mode is only started after this
tolerance time has elapsed.
• The system changes to the locking status if an invalid status is detected after the
tolerance time has elapsed.

68 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Functionality and conditions for changing operating mode:

• It is possible to change an operating mode while the OSSD is in the ON state.
• There may be additional function-specific conditions for switching to operating
modes that perform a specific function (e.g., muting). The operating mode change
is only completed if these conditions are met.
• The response time of the protective device remains unchanged during a change of
operating mode.
• During a change of operating mode, all input signals continue to be monitored
and, in the event of further signal changes, the systems waits for the tolerance
time.
° If the previous operating mode change has not yet been completed after the
tolerance time has elapsed, a new operating mode change is not started.
° If the input signals for the operating mode change do not correspond to the
current operating mode after the previous operating mode change has been
completed, the corresponding operating mode change is started. Intermedi‐
ate changes are not taken into account.
Monitoring the maximum switchover time
• You can configure a maximum time for the operating mode change. The maximum
time must be greater than the tolerance time.
• The maximum time is monitored each time the operating mode is changed. If the
change to the new operating mode has not been completed after the maximum
time has elapsed, the OSSDs switch to the OFF state.
• The operating mode change is carried out immediately after the maximum time
has elapsed and regardless of the function-specific conditions. Once the change‐
over is complete, the OSSDs can switch back to the ON state depending on the
other conditions.
Functionality when switching on
• After switching on the system, first switch to a standard operating mode (with
configuration). Only then is it possible to switch to alignment mode or OSSD OFF
mode.
• The OSSDs remain in the OFF state until the first operating mode change has been
completed.
• Monitoring of the input signals for valid combinations is only carried out after
switching on the system if at least one input signal is active.

Complementary information
Additional information on the operating modes of the individual functions and possi‐
ble function-specific conditions for changing the operating mode can be found in the
description of the functions and in the Configuration section.

4.3.9.1 Operating mode: OSSD OFF mode

Overview
You can assign an operating mode to the OSSD OFF mode. If you select this operating
mode during operation, the OSSDs switch to the OFF state. The OSSDs remain in the
OFF state as long as the OSSD OFF mode is active.

Complementary information
• Muting is deactivated in OSSD OFF mode and the muting signals are not evalu‐
ated.
• Muting is reset when switching to OSSD OFF mode. This also applies to all muting
statuses and monitors. After exiting OSSD OFF mode, a new, complete muting
cycle is required.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 69

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

4.3.9.2 Operating mode: Alignment mode

Overview
You can assign the laser alignment aid to an operating mode. If you select alignment
mode during operation, the integrated laser alignment aid on the sender is activated.
The integrated laser alignment aid on the sender is deactivated when the alignment
mode is deactivated.

Prerequisites
• The sender and receiver are connected to each other.

Further topics
• "Laser alignment aid", page 81

4.3.9.3 Calculating the times for an operating mode change

Overview
You can calculate the maximum total time required for an operating mode change.
This total time only applies, however, if the operating mode change can be carried out
immediately.
The following circumstances prevent the operating mode change from being carried
out immediately and therefore increase the overall time:
• A previous operating mode change has not yet been completed.
• The function-specific conditions for the operating mode change (e.g. muting and
override are deactivated) are not yet met.
The maximum switchover time for the operating mode change can be monitored and
limited if necessary.
Depending on the application, it must be determined whether the switchover time for
the operating mode change must be added to the response time.

Formula
Total time = tOPM_Tol + tOPM_Proc + tOPM_Cas_Add + tOPM_Feat_Add
The total time for an operating mode change is based on the following values:
• Tolerance time (configurable): tOPM_Tol
• Switchover time: tOPM_Proc
° Control via safety inputs: maximum 60 ms
° Control via IO-Link: maximum 35 ms
• Additional time for cascade: tOPM_Cas_Add
° Control via safety inputs: maximum 110 ms
° Control via IO-Link: maximum 156 ms
° Single system: 0 ms
• Additional time for functions: tOPM_Feat_Add
° The additional time for functions must be taken into account when switching
between standard operating modes (configurable). The additional time for
functions is described in the respective sections for the functions.
° If you switch from or to OSSD OFF mode, the additional time is 0 ms.
° If you switch from or to alignment mode, the additional time is 0 ms.
Examples
• Switch from OSSD OFF mode to alignment mode
• Control via IO-Link
• Cascade
• Tolerance time: 0 ms

70 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Total time: 0 ms + 35 ms + 156 ms + 0 ms = 191 ms

• Switch between two operating modes with different muting settings
• Control via safety inputs
• Single system
• Tolerance time: 1,000 ms
• Response time: 10 ms (example value, the response time for the specific device
and configuration must be determined)
• Multiple sampling 2
tOPM_Feat_Add (Muting) = 10 ms / 2 = 5 ms
Total time: 1,000 ms + 60 ms + 0 ms + 5 ms = 1,065 ms

4.4 Integration into the electrical control system

Overview
This section contains important information about integration into the electrical control
system. Information about the individual steps for the electrical installation of the
device: see "Electrical installation", page 104.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
In the case of non-compliance, it is possible that the dangerous state of the machine
may not be stopped or not stopped in a timely manner.
► Make sure that the following control and electrical requirements are met so that
the product can fulfill its protective function.

Requirements for use

The output signals of the protective device must be analyzed by downstream controllers
in such a way that the dangerous state of the machine is ended safely. Depending on
the safety concept, the signal is analyzed by safety relays or a safety controller, for
example.

• It must be possible to electrically influence the control of the machine

• The electrical control system of the machine must meet the requirements of
IEC 60204-1
• When using a safety controller, different signal levels of both OSSDs must be
detected depending on applicable national regulations or required reliability of the
safety function. The maximum discrepancy time tolerated by the controller must
be selected according to the application.
• The OSSD1 and OSSD2 output signals must not be connected to each other
• In the machine controller, the signals of both OSSDs must be processed sepa‐
rately

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 71

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Figure 35: Dual-channel and isolated connection of OSSD1 and OSSD2

• The machine must switch to the safe state at any time if at least one of the two
OSSDs switches to the OFF state.
• Prevent the formation of a potential difference between the load and the protec‐
tive device. If you connect loads to the OSSDs (switch outputs) that then also
switch if controlled with negative voltage (e.g., electro-mechanical contactor with‐
out reverse polarity protection diode), you must connect the 0 V connections of
these loads and those of the corresponding protective device individually and
directly to the same 0 V terminal strip. In the event of a fault, this is the only way to
ensure that there can be no potential difference between the 0 V connections of
the loads and those of the corresponding protective device.

Figure 36: No potential difference between load and protective device

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
In the case of non-compliance, it is possible that the dangerous state of the machine
may not be stopped or not stopped in a timely manner.
Downstream contactors must be positively guided and monitored depending on appli‐
cable national regulations or required reliability of the safety function.
► Make sure that downstream contactors are monitored (external device monitoring,
EDM).

72 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

DANGER
Hazard due to unexpected starting of the machine
A restart interlock must be implemented depending on applicable national regulations
or required reliability of the safety function.
► Make sure that a restart interlock is implemented.

Requirements for the electrical control of the machine

Both outputs are short-circuit protected to 24 V DC and 0 V. If a switch-off condition is
present (e.g., light path interruption), the OSSDs are in the OFF state. In the event of a
device fault, at least one OSSD is in the OFF state.
The protective device complies with the rules for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
for the industrial sector.

NOTE
Using the device in residential areas may cause radio interference. The operating entity
is responsible for taking appropriate measures (e.g., shielding).

The following requirements are met:

• The external voltage supply of the protective device must be capable of buffering
brief power failures of 20 ms as specified in IEC 60204-1.
• The power supply unit must provide safe isolation according to IEC 60204-1
(SELV/PELV). Suitable power supply units are available as accessories from SICK.

Further topics
• "Accessories", page 207

4.4.1 Restart interlock

Overview
The restart interlock prevents the machine from automatically starting up, for example
after a protective device has responded while the machine is operating or after chang‐
ing the machine’s operating mode.
Depending on the regulations which apply at the place of installation, a restart interlock
may be required.
The safety light curtain has an internal restart interlock.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to unexpected starting of the machine
The machine may not restart if the OSSDs switch to the ON state once the reset
pushbutton has been pressed. The control must ensure that the machine only restarts
if the machine start button is also pressed after the reset pushbutton.
► Make sure that the machine can only restart once the reset pushbutton and start
button have been pressed in the specified order.

Principle of operation
Before the machine can be restarted, the operator must reset the restart interlock.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 73

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

1 2 3 4

Figure 37: Schematic representation of operation with restart interlock

The dangerous state of the machine (1) is brought to an end if the light path is inter‐
rupted (2) and is not re-enabled (3) until the operator presses the reset pushbutton
located outside the hazardous area (4). The machine can then be restarted.
Depending on applicable national regulations, a restart interlock must be available if it
is possible to stand behind the protective device. Observe IEC 60204-1.

4.4.1.1 Integrated restart interlock and reset

Prerequisites
• A reset device, such as a reset pushbutton, is connected.

24 V DC
RES

Figure 38: Electrical diagram of the reset device

Using an integrated restart interlock

The restart interlock is configured once the reset pushbutton has been connected.
When configured via the SP1/SP2 system plug and the restart interlock is configured,
the application diagnostic output located on the same plug connector as the reset
pushbutton signals when the reset pushbutton needs to be pressed.
With a software configuration, the application diagnostic output, which is located on the
same plug connector as the reset pushbutton, can be assigned a different signal.
The following applies to the restart interlock:
• If the protective field is clear once the machine has been switched on or following
an interruption, the OSSDs do not switch to the ON state
• If someone presses the reset pushbutton and then lets go of it when the protec‐
tive field is clear, the OSSDs switch to the ON state
• The machine may not restart yet. The operator must also press the machine start
button after having pressed the reset pushbutton.

Single system
The reset pushbutton signal can be present at the following inputs in the single
system:
• In3 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In2 at the extension connection of the receiver
• In10 on the X1 connection of the DMM4 extension module

74 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

The reset pushbutton signal may only ever be present at exactly one of the possible
inputs.

Cascade
The reset pushbutton signal can be present at the following inputs in a cascade:
• In3 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In2 on the extension connection of the last receiver of the guest device
• In10 on the X1 connection of the DMM4 extension module
The reset pushbutton signal may only ever be present at exactly one of the possible
inputs.
A total of just one reset pushbutton may be connected to a cascade comprising two or
three safety light curtains.

Further topics
• "Configuring the restart interlock", page 125
• "Configuring (smart) restart interlock", page 139

4.4.1.2 Smart restart interlock

Overview
You can also use the integrated restart interlock as an smart restart interlock.
With the smart restart interlock, the number of beams interrupted is taken into account
each time the protective field is interrupted.
You can define the maximum number of interrupted beams at which the OSSDs auto‐
matically return to the ON state after a protective field interruption without you having to
press the reset pushbutton.
You can calculate the object size based on the defined number of beams.

Important information

NOTE
If the safety light curtain is configured with an smart restart interlock, it must be
ensured that people standing behind the protective field are reliably detected.
The object size (maximum number of beams) must be defined taking into account the
regulations applicable at the place of use.
If someone stands behind the protective field, the system must always switch to the
reset required status.
If the minimum object size at which the reset pushbutton must be actuated after an
interruption of the protective field is > 200 mm, the increased risk of persons standing
behind the protective field not being reliably detected by the ESPE must be taken into
account.

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration
• In combination with reduced resolution: The configured object size (number of
beams) is larger than the configured number of beams for the reduced resolution.

Functionality
The protective device detects an object of a certain size and the OSSDs switch to the
OFF state.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 75

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

If the object corresponds to or is smaller than the configured size, the OSSDs auto‐
matically switch back to the ON state as soon as the object is removed from the
protective field. This also applies to multiple objects in the protective field as long as
they correspond to or are smaller than the configured size.
If the detected object is larger than the configured size, the system switches to the
reset required status.

The following applies to the smart restart interlock:

• The function can be configured on a single system or a host system.
• The function can also be configured for a cascade, but the OSSDs only automati‐
cally switch back to the ON state for the host system (depending on the configured
object size); the reset pushbutton must always be pressed for guest systems.
• The OSSDs only switch back to the ON state automatically if the OFF state was
triggered exclusively by one or more objects in the protective field.
• If the OFF state resulted from other causes or functions (see below), the reset
pushbutton must be pressed.
All of the following requirements must be met for automatic restart:
• All objects in the protective field correspond to or are smaller than the configured
size.
• The protective fields of guest devices in a cascade are clear.
• This is not the first activation of the OSSDs after switching on.
• The integrated laser alignment aid is not active.
• No operating mode change was carried out.
• The configured inputs for safety sensors (SDI) are active.
• Muting and override are not active.
Object size
The object size depends on the physical resolution and the configured number of
beams.
Table 29: Calculation of the object sizes for the smart restart interlock
Physical resolu‐ Minimum object size at which the Maximum object size at which the
tion reset pushbutton must be actuated OSSDs automatically switch back to
after a protective field interruption 1) the ON state after a protective field
interruption 1)
14 mm n × 10 mm + 14 mm n × 10 mm
30 mm n × 25 mm + 30 mm n × 25 mm
1) n = Configured number of beams

Further topics
• "Configuring (smart) restart interlock", page 139

4.4.2 External device monitoring (EDM)

Overview
The protective device has an internal EDM.
The external switching elements (external device monitoring, EDM) must be inspected
in line with the regulations which apply at the place of installation or the required
reliability of the safety function.
External device monitoring (EDM) monitors the status of downstream contactors.

Prerequisites
• Positively guided contactors are used for shutting down the machine.

76 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Functionality
If you configure external device monitoring, the protective device then checks the
contactors after every interruption to the light path and before the machine restarts.
External device monitoring is then able to detect if one of the contactor contacts is
welded, for instance. In this case, the OSSDs remain in the OFF state.

r
K1
k2 k1 OSSD 1

24 V DC 0 V DC
EDM
OSSD 2
K2

Figure 39: Electrical diagram of external device monitoring (EDM)

You must implement external device monitoring electrically so that the two N/C con‐
tacts (k1, k2) close in a positively guided manner when the contactors (K1, K2) reach
their de-energized position once the protective device has responded. 24 V is then
present at the input of external device monitoring. If 24 V is not present when the
protective device has responded, one of the contactors is defective and external device
monitoring prevents the machine from restarting.

Connection
The external device monitoring can be connected to one of the following inputs:
• In4 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In1 at the extension connection of the receiver
The external device monitoring can only ever be present at exactly one of the possible
inputs.

4.4.3 Application diagnostic output

Overview
The ESPE has a application diagnostic output on the M12, 8-pin system connection
and on the extension connection of the receiver. Two additional application diagnostic
outputs are available via the DMM4 extension module.
Depending on the configuration, the application diagnostic output signals a certain
status of the ESPE, e.g., if the reset pushbutton must be engaged or if there is a weak
signal at the receiver.
For a signal of the ESPE to be displayed, a light can be connected to the application
diagnostic output or the signal can be transmitted to the machine controller.

0 V DC
ADO

Figure 40: Electrical diagram of the application diagnostic output

Complementary information
The application diagnostic outputs cannot be used for safety-related functions.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 77

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

When implementing a cascade, the extension connection of the last guest device can
be used for the application diagnostic output.
The system automatically detects new guest devices in the cascade. To ensure the
system reliably detects new guest devices, the following output signals are not available
at the application diagnostic output of the extension connection of the receiver for up to
30 seconds after the system is switched on:
• Weak signal
• Ignored object
• Muting error
• Status of protective field
• Object in the protective field of the guest device (smart presence detection)
• OSSD state
• State of the safety sensor inputs (SDI)

Further topics
• "Configuring application diagnostic output", page 126
• "Configuring application diagnostic output", page 138

4.4.3.1 Output signals

The device can send the following output signals via the application diagnostic output.
Table 30: Available output signals
Output signal Explanation Configura‐ Configura‐
tion via tion via
system Safety
plug 1) Designer 2)
Weak signal HIGH state: A receiver of the ESPE is receiving a ✓ ✓
weak signal from the sender, e.g., because the
sender and receiver are not correctly aligned or
because the front screen is contaminated.
LOW state: No weak signal is detected or the
OSSDs are in the OFF state.
Ignored object HIGH state: The ESPE detects an object that is ✓ ✓
smaller than the configured reduced resolution.
LOW state: No ignored object is detected or the
OSSDs are in the OFF state.
Reset required When the protective field of the ESPE is clear again ✓ ✓
after an interruption, the application diagnostic out‐
put signals that the reset pushbutton needs to be
pressed.
The application diagnostic output signals that reset
is required and periodically switches between HIGH
and LOW so that any suitable lamp that is con‐
nected flashes.
Muting status HIGH state: The ESPE is in muting status (the pro‐ ✓ ✓
tective effect of the ESPE is temporarily bypassed)
or in the override status.
LOW state: The ESPE is neither in the muting status
nor in the override status.
Override If an error occurs during a valid muting condition ✓ ✓
required or a Smart Box Detection condition is violated, the
ESPE changes to the override required status.
The application diagnostic output signals this state
by periodically switching between HIGH and LOW so
a connected suitable lamp flashes.

78 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Output signal Explanation Configura‐ Configura‐

tion via tion via
system Safety
plug 1) Designer 2)
Valid object for HIGH state: If Smart Box Detection is configured, ✓ -
Smart Box a valid object is detected or Smart Box Detection
Detection Override is active.
LOW state: No valid object is detected and Smart
Box Detection Override is not active.
Muting error HIGH state: No muting error has occurred. - ✓
LOW state: A muting error has occurred during a
valid muting condition.
Muting object in HIGH: Muting or override is active and an object - ✓
protective field is detected in the bypassed part of the protective
field.
LOW: Muting or override is not active or no object
is detected in the bypassed part of the protective
field.
Object in the HIGH state: An object is detected in the unmoni‐ - ✓
protective field tored protective field of the guest device.
of the guest LOW state: No object is detected in the unmoni‐
device (smart tored protective field of the guest device.
presence detec‐
tion)
OSSD state HIGH state: The OSSDs are in the ON state. - ✓
LOW state: At least one OSSD is in the OFF state.
When the OSSDs are switched on, the signal is acti‐
vated after a configured delay of 0 … 3 s.
Status of protec‐ HIGH state: All protective fields of the ESPE are - ✓
tive field clear or are not monitored (smart presence detec‐
tion).
LOW state: At least one protective field or a moni‐
tored protective field (smart presence detection) of
the ESPE is interrupted.
State of the HIGH state: All configured inputs of the safety sen‐ - ✓
safety sensor sors (SDI) are active.
inputs (SDI) LOW state: At least one configured input for safety
sensors (SDI) is deactivated.
1) When configuring via the system plugs, the output signals are assigned automatically according to the
other configuration settings.
2) When configuring via Safety Designer, you can manually assign the available output signals.

Application diagnostic outputs can also be assigned to combined output signals. The
combinations are possible because the different output signals cannot occur at the
same time.
Combinations of functions that cannot be used together (e.g., muting and Smart Box
Detection) can also be selected during configuration in Safety Designer. These combi‐
nations are to be understood in such a way that either one or the other output signal is
output according to the other configuration settings.

Table 31: Combined output signals

Combination Explanation
Reset required or override The application diagnostic output signals reset required or over‐
required ride required by periodically changing between the HIGH and LOW
state.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 79

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Combination Explanation
OSSD state or reset The application diagnostic output signals reset required by periodi‐
required cally changing between the HIGH and LOW state.
If no reset is required, the application diagnostic output outputs
the OSSD state. The signal is activated after a configured delay of
0 … 3 s.
(Muting status or valid The application diagnostic output signals reset required by periodi‐
object for Smart Box Detec‐ cally changing between the HIGH and LOW state.
tion) or reset required If no reset is required, the application diagnostic output either out‐
puts the muting status output signal or the valid object for Smart
Box Detection output signal depending on the configuration.
(muting status or valid The application diagnostic output signals reset required or over‐
object for Smart Box Detec‐ ride required by periodically changing between the HIGH and LOW
tion) or reset required or state.
override required If no reset or override is required, the application diagnostic output
either outputs the muting status output signal or the valid object
for Smart Box Detection output signal depending on the configura‐
tion.

4.4.4 Signal lamp

Overview
You can attach an external signal lamp to the system that outputs the state of the
application diagnostic output, e.g., to indicate muting or Smart Box Detection.
In this case, the signal lamp indicates temporary muting or the detection of a valid
object by Smart Box Detection during operation.

Prerequisites
• The signal lamp must be visible from all sides of the hazardous area and visible to
the operator of the system.

Complementary information
You can optionally use a receiver with an integrated LED. The integrated LED is located
in the end cap of the receiver.

4.4.5 Connection of sender and receiver

Overview
If you connect the sender and receiver, you will also receive all relevant information via
the sender.
The sender and receiver can be connected to the control cabinet in different ways
depending on requirements:
• Separate connecting cables for sender and receiver
• Separate connecting cables for sender and receiver with connection in the control
cabinet
• Connection of sender and receiver via a T-connector, shared 5-pin or 8-pin con‐
necting cable to the control cabinet
• Separate connection of sender and receiver to an extension module

Prerequisites
• The type codes of the sender and receiver must be identical at the following place
in the number sequence.
° Variant 1: C4P-******0***
° Variant 2: C4P-******1***

80 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

• If the type codes at this place in the number sequence differ, the connection
between the sender and receiver must be disconnected.

Connection of sender and receiver

Connect the sender and receiver to each other in the control cabinet or via a T-connec‐
tor. Alternatively, you can connect the sender and receiver to the extension module.
Connect the following wires between the sender and receiver in the control cabinet:
• 0 V DC of sender and receiver
• +24 V DC of sender and receiver
• MFP1 of sender and receiver
In a cascade, only the host sender and host receiver are connected to the control
cabinet.
The connected sender is detected automatically.

Connection via T-connector

Alternatively, you can connect the sender and receiver to each other via a T-connector
(with an optional pushbutton for the laser alignment aid). In such cases, you only
require a cable to the control cabinet and the status will also be indicated on both
sides. Please note that the sender and receiver are protected jointly by one fuse when
a T-connector is used. In the T-connector, all contacts are routed from the female
connector to the same pins of both male connectors.
The T-splitter must only be connected to the system connection of an individual device
or a host device. The T-splitter must not be connected to the DMM4 extension module.
Instead, connect the sender and receiver directly to the DMM4 extension module.

Information output on both sides

If the sender and receiver are connected to each other, the following information is
output on both devices:
• Status of protective field
• OSSD state
• Status display (e.g., muting active)
• Diagnostic data on the sender and receiver via NFC, IO-Link or Safety Designer
If the sender and receiver are not connected to each other, this information is only
available on the receiver.
When connecting to the extension module, you can configure both the sender and
receiver using the Safety Designer software.

Further topics
• "Accessories", page 207
• "Protection against interference from systems in close proximity to each other",
page 36

4.4.6 Laser alignment aid

Overview
The integrated laser alignment aid can be controlled either via a switch or pushbutton
on the sender or via a sender-receiver connection (Safety Designer, IO-Link, SICK Safety
Assistant, alignment mode).
The integrated laser alignment aid is active if one of the controllers requests laser
activation and is only deactivated if none of the controllers request laser activation.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 81

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The integrated laser alignment aid switches the OSSDs to the OFF state.
► Ensure that the outputs of the ESPE have no effect on the machine when the
integrated laser alignment aid is activated.
► Only use the integrated laser alignment aid to align the ESPE.

Prerequisites
Requirements for control via pushbutton/switch
• A pushbutton is connected.
• A T-connector with pushbutton is connected.
• A switch is connected.
Requirements for control via a sender-receiver connection
• The sender and receiver are connected to each other.
Pushbuttons
The pushbutton is mounted at the system connection of the sender between the
system plug and the connecting cable.
The pushbutton can be temporarily mounted for alignments or used to maintain a
permanent connection.
Functionality of the pushbutton
• Press the pushbutton once and release: integrated laser alignment aid is switched
on.
• Press the pushbutton again and release: integrated laser alignment aid is
switched off.

Switch
Switches are not suitable for control if the sender and receiver are connected to each
other via a T-connector.
The switch is mounted in the control cabinet. A relay or a PLC can also be used as
a switch to enable the integrated laser alignment aid to be switched on and off via a
control panel, for example.
The switch must be connected in accordance with the circuit diagram below.

s
S1
In1
24 V DC
In2
0 V DC

Figure 41: Switch for the integrated laser alignment aid

• S1 closed: integrated laser alignment aid is switched on.

• S1 open: integrated laser alignment aid is switched off.

IO-Link
If the sender and receiver are connected with each other, the laser alignment aid can
also be activated by a command from IO-Link.
"IO-Link", page 15

82 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Safety Designer
If the sender and receiver are connected to each other, the laser alignment aid can also
be activated via the Safety Designer configuration software.
"Configuration via Safety Designer", page 130

SICK Safety Assistant

If the sender and receiver are connected to each other, the laser alignment aid can also
be activated via NFC using the SICK Safety Assistant app.
"Service functions of the mobile app", page 147

Alignment mode
If the sender and receiver are connected to each other, the laser alignment aid can also
be activated via the alignment mode.
"Operating mode: Alignment mode", page 70

Further topics
• "Connection of sender and receiver", page 80
• "IO-Link", page 85
• "Accessories", page 207

4.4.7 Cascading
Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
If 2 or more identical safety light curtains (same resolution and same protective field
height) are used in a cascade, the protective device can be disabled if the connecting
cables are switched round.
► Make sure (e.g., by routing the cables appropriately) that the operator is unable to
switch round the connecting cables of 2 senders or receivers of the same type.

Prerequisites
• The type codes of the connected sender devices are identical at the following
place in the number sequence.
° Variant 1: C4P-******0***
° Variant 2: C4P-******1***
• The type codes of the connected receiver devices are identical at the following
place in the number sequence.
° Variant 1: C4P-******0***
° Variant 2: C4P-******1***
• The type codes of the sender devices may differ from the receiver devices at
this place in the number sequence if the sender and receiver devices are not
connected with each other.

Integrating safety light curtains in a cascade

You can use cascading to connect up to 3 safety light curtains, e.g., to provide reliable
presence detection. The connected devices act like a long safety light curtain. Only one
device, the host, is connected to the control cabinet. The second device, guest 1, is
connected to the host. The third device, guest 2, is connected to guest 1.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 83

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Advantages of cascading:
• Rapid connection, no additional external circuitry required
• The protective field evaluation of the cascaded systems is synchronized.
• No optical mutual interference between the protective fields within a cascade.
Host and guests are operated with the same beam coding.
• Resolution and protective field heights of the individual systems may be different

3 5

4 3 5

S 4
1

R
2
Figure 42: Cascade
1 Sender
2 Receiver
3 Host
4 Guest 1
5 Guest 2

Use of system plugs in a cascade

Information on using the system plug in a cascade can be found at "System plug",
page 17.

4.4.8 Smart presence detection

Overview
The safety light curtain features smart presence detection for access and hazardous
area protection.

Prerequisites
• Function package SP2 or DMM4

84 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Functionality
Smart presence detection is implemented using a cascade. The guest system is only
active if the protective field of the host system has been interrupted. The OSSDs then
change to the OFF state and the machine is stopped. As long as the protective field of
the host or guest system is interrupted, machine start-up is not possible.
If all of the protective fields have been clear for at least 0.5 s, the OSSDs change back
to the ON state and the guest system returns to sleep mode.
Smart presence detection prevents an unintentional machine shutdown, for example if
chips fall into the hazardous area protected by the guest systems.

4.4.9 IO-Link
Overview
You can connect an IO-Link connector, which is available as an accessory, to the
extension connection.
The IO-Link connector is used to establish a connection between suitable devices and
an IO-Link master, enabling communication via IO-Link.
You can use IO-Link to read out diagnostic and configuration data (when configuring via
the SP1/SP2 system plug) from the connected devices.
The IO-Link connector is also used to connect two signals (e.g., muting signals).

Important information

NOTICE
System functions can be controlled and signals transmitted via IO-Link. This includes,
for example, activating the integrated laser alignment aid. The integrated laser align‐
ment aid switches the OSSDs to the OFF state.
No authentication on the system via a user group and password is required for data
transmission or for changing data transmitted via IO-Link.
► Ensure that data cannot be changed unintentionally via IO-Link.

Diagnostic and configuration data

When configuring via the SP1/SP2 system plug, you can access the configuration
data via IO-Link. You can use the SDD for SOPAS ET to display the diagnostic and
configuration data transmitted via IO-Link.
The following data can be output via IO-Link:
• Application diagnostic output status information
• Device information and device status
• Configuration of the device (when configuring via the SP1/SP2 system plug)
• Status of each individual light beam
• Error history
• Reasons for the last switches to red
Control and signal transmission
The following functions can be controlled via IO-Link:
• LED signal behavior of the field indicator
• LED light behavior of the integrated indicator lamp on the receiver (optional)
• Switching on and off of the integrated laser alignment aid
The following signals can be transmitted via IO-Link:
• Muting release
• Switching from partial muting and muting

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 85

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

• Belt stop
• Operating mode selection

Complementary information
The product must be supplied with voltage to enable communication with an IO-Link
master via the IO-Link connector.
Additional information on connecting the IO-Link connector can be found in the IO-Link
connector mounting instructions.

Further topics
• "Accessories", page 207

4.4.10 Muting
Overview
To use muting, muting sensors must be connected to the ESPE.
Facilities for connecting:
• The muting sensors are connected to a muting connector or IO-Link connector.
The muting connector makes it possible to connect 2 muting sensors and one
muting lamp. The muting sensors do not have to be arranged with an offset.
• The signals of the muting sensors are present at the extension connection of the
receiver.
The muting sensors must be offset so that the signals arrive at the device at
different times (at least 50 ms apart).
• The signals of the muting sensors are distributed across the 8-pin system connec‐
tion and the extension connection of the receiver.
The muting sensors do not have to be arranged with an offset.
• Signals of the muting sensors are present at the DMM4 extension module.
The muting sensors do not have to be arranged with an offset.

Complementary information
Override can be present at one of the following connections:
• System connection M12, 8-pin
• Extension connection of the receiver
• X1 connection on the DMM4 extension module
Detailed information on using the muting connector can be found in the mounting
instructions for the muting connector.

Further topics
• "Cross-circuit monitoring", page 52
• "Electrical installation", page 104
• "Accessories", page 207

4.4.10.1 Distributing muting signals

Overview
For the cross muting and exit monitoring muting variants , you can connect two muting
signals to the DMM4 extension module, to the extension connection of the receiver, or
to the 8-pin system connection.
For the entry/exit monitoring muting variant, you can connect four muting signals to the
DMM4 extension module.

86 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Distributing muting signals (two muting sensors)

In the normal configuration, the muting signals are present at In1 and In2 of the
extension connection of the receiver. If the muting signals are present at In1 and In2 of
the extension connection of the receiver and no muting connector or IO-Link connector
is used, the muting sensors can only become active at intervals of at least 50 ms.
If a muting signal is to be supplied by the controller, however, muting signal 1 can
be moved from In1 of the extension connection of the receiver to In4 of the system
connection (M12, 8-pin).
When using the DMM4 extension module, the muting signals can also be present at the
In5 and In6 inputs of the A1 and A2 connections.

Distributing muting signals (four muting sensors)

The muting signals can be present at the In5, In6, In7 and In8 inputs of the A1, A2, B1
and B2 connections of the DMM4 extension module.

Supplementary signals
You can connect supplementary signals for the following functions:
• Muting release
• Switching from partial muting to muting
The following inputs are available for the supplementary signals:
• In3 or In4 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In1 or In2 on the extension connection of the receiver
• In10 or In12 on the DMM4 extension module

Belt stop
The following inputs are available for the belt stop function:
• In3 or In4 on the M12, 8-pin system connection
• In17 at the M12, 8-pin system connection (only available when an extension
module is connected)

Additional conditions
If the following signals are present at the same connection (8-pin system connection
or extension connection of the receiver without using muting connectors or IO-Link
connectors), the signals can only become active at intervals of at least 5 ms:
• Supplementary signal for muting release, and supplementary signal for switching
from partial muting to muting
• Muting release supplementary signal, and muting signal 1 or 2
• Supplementary signal for switching from partial muting to muting, and muting
signal 1 or 2

Further topics
• "System connection (M12, 8-pin)", page 107
• "Extension connection (M12, 5-pin)", page 108

4.4.11 Control switch for Smart Box Detection Override

Overview
Smart Box Detection Override is always active if Smart Box Detection has been config‐
ured.
The control switch for Smart Box Detection Override is connected to the 8-pin system
connection.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 87

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Further topics
• "Electrical installation", page 104

4.4.12 Control switches for operating modes

Overview
You can use the following inputs on the X3 connection of the DMM4 extension module
to switch between the operating modes:
• In13
• In14
• In15
As soon as the X3 connection is used for operating modes, all three inputs on the con‐
nection are intended for operating mode selection. Even if you only use two operating
modes, you cannot use the third input for other functions.

Further topics
• "Electrical installation", page 104

4.4.13 Inputs for safety sensors (SDI)

Overview
The DMM4 extension module has 2 inputs for safety sensors on each of 3 connections
(X1, X2, X3). This allows you to connect up to 3 additional safety sensors with dual-
channel outputs.
You can connect safety sensors with the following properties:
• Safety sensors with dual-channel semiconductor outputs (equivalent switching,
self-monitored, positive switching (PNP))
° Example: OSSDs
° Connections: X1, X2, X3
° The test pulse width of the connected safety sensors is ≤ 1 ms.
• Dual-channel, contact-based switching elements (equivalent switching)
° Example: Emergency stop pushbutton
° Connections: X1, X3
The OSSDs are in the OFF state if at least one configured input for safety sensors is
deactivated (LOW state).

Important information

WARNING
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The manufacturer of the machine must check whether contact-based switching ele‐
ments can be used and which requirements must be met for the use of contact-based
switching elements.
The requirements for the regular thorough check of contact-based switching elements
must be defined by the manufacturer of the machine.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
If contact-based switching elements are used and the switching elements and the
DMM4 extension module are mounted outside the control cabinet, you must protect
the corresponding connection cables from short-circuits and cross-circuits, e.g., by
laying them in suitable cable ducts.

88 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

Prerequisites
• Function package DMM4
• Software configuration

Functionality
The OSSDs of the protective device switch to the OFF state within the response time
(SDI) if at least one configured input for safety sensors is deactivated (LOW state).
The OSSDs of the protective device can only switch to the ON state if all configured
inputs for safety sensors are active (HIGH state).
The OSSDs only switch back to the ON state after all configured inputs for safety
sensors have been active for at least 50 ms (HIGH state).
Muting is reset to the OFF state when the OSSDs are changed. This also applies to
all muting statuses and monitors. If the OSSDs then switch to the ON state, a new,
complete muting cycle is required.

4.4.14 Connection diagrams

You can find the connection diagrams at www.sick.com. To do so, enter the product
part number in the search field (part number: see the entry in the “P/N” or “Ident. no.”
field on the type label).

4.5 Testing plan

Overview
The manufacturer of the machine and the operating entity must define all required
thorough checks. The definition must be based on the application conditions and the
risk assessment and must be documented in a traceable manner.
► When defining the thorough check, please note the following:
° Define the type and execution of the thorough check.
° Define the frequency of the thorough check.
° Notify the machine operators of the thorough check and instruct them
accordingly.
The following thorough checks are often defined in connection with a protective
device:
• Thorough check during commissioning and modifications
• Regular thorough check
Thorough check during commissioning and modifications
Before commissioning the machine and after making changes, you must check whether
the safety functions are fulfilling their planned purpose and whether persons are being
adequately protected.
The protective device and its application must be thoroughly checked in the following
situations:
• Before commissioning
• After changes to the configuration
• After changes to the mounting, the alignment, or the electrical connection
• After replacing components (e.g., sender, receiver, extension module)
• After plugging in a system plug
The following points are often helpful for the definition of the thorough check:
• Does the thorough check have to be completed by qualified safety personnel?
• Can the thorough check be completed by personnel specially qualified and author‐
ized to do so?

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 89

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

• Does the thorough check have to be documented in a traceable manner?

• Can the thorough check be carried out according to a check list? (see "Checklist
for initial commissioning and commissioning", page 220)
• Do the machine operators know the function of the protective device?
• Have the machine operators been trained to work on the machine?
• Have the machine operators been notified about modifications to the machine?
• Does the hazardous area being secured have to be checked with a test rod? (see
"Test rod check", page 90)
► Define all guidelines for the thorough check.

Regular thorough check

The thorough check is intended to ensure that the safety functions are fulfilling their
planned purpose and whether persons are being adequately protected.
The following points are often helpful for the definition of the thorough check:
• Which thorough check must be carried out and how is it carried out?
° Test rod check, page 90
° Visual check of the machine and the protective device, page 93
° Inputs for safety sensors (SDI)
• How often does the thorough check have to be carried out?
• Do the machine operators have to be notified of the thorough check and do they
need to be instructed accordingly?
► Define all guidelines for the thorough check.

4.5.1 Test rod check

Overview
The rod test check is used to check whether the hazardous point is only accessible via
the protective field of the safety light curtain and whether the protective device is able
to identify each time the hazardous point is approached.
The test is carried out with an opaque test rod whose diameter corresponds to the
resolution of the safety light curtain.
If several safety light curtains are connected to each other in a cascade, the complete
check for every safety light curtain in the cascade is carried out. During the check,
catch the field indicator of the device you are currently testing.

Important information

DANGER
Use of incorrect test rods
Persons or parts of the body to be protected may not be detected in operation.
► Only use the test rod with the diameter specified on the type label of the safety
light curtain.
► If the resolution is reduced, use the test rod that ensures effective resolution of
the safety light curtain.
► With a reduced resolution and configured Smart Box Detection, use the test
rod that matches the effective resolution of the safety light curtain with a free
protective field.

90 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

DANGER
Hazard due to unexpected starting of the machine
► Make sure that the dangerous state of the machine is and remains switched off
during the check.
► Make sure that the outputs of the safety light curtain have no effect on the
machine during the check of the components.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
Do not operate the machine if the field indicator lights up green or yellow during the
check!
► If the field indicator lights up green or yellow during the check (even if only briefly)
work must stop at the machine.
► In this case, the mounting and electrical installation of the safety light curtain
must be checked by qualified safety personnel.

NOTE
To test the smart presence detection, interrupt the protective field on the host device so
that the OSSDs change to the OFF state. Otherwise, the guest device remains in sleep
mode and the test rod check will not be very meaningful.

Prerequisites
• The protective field is clear.
• The field indicator lights up green or flashes yellow.
The field indicator only flashes yellow if the internal restart interlock is configured
and a reset is required.
• If operating modes are configured, a standard operating mode with configuration
must be activated.

Procedure
1. Move the test rod slowly through the area to be protected (e.g., machine opening),
as indicated by the arrow, see figure 43.
2. Watch the field indicator on the receiver during the check. The field indicator on
the receiver must continuously light up red. The field indicator must not light up
green or flash yellow.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 91

Subject to change without notice
4 PROJECT PLANNING

Figure 43: Test rod check: Step 1

3. Then, guide the test rod along the edges of the area to be protected, as indicated
by the arrow, see figure 44.
4. Watch the field indicator on the receiver during the check. The field indicator on
the receiver must continuously light up red. The field indicator must not light up
green or flash yellow.

Figure 44: Test rod check: Step 3

5. If one or more deflector mirrors are used, then the test rod should also be guided
slowly through the area to be protected directly in front of the deflector mirrors.
6. Watch the field indicator on the receiver during the check. The field indicator on
the receiver must continuously light up red. The field indicator must not light up
green or flash yellow.
7. After the test rod has been removed from the protective field, make sure that the
protective field is clear and the field indicator is green or yellow.

92 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 PROJECT PLANNING 4

8. If a dynamic protective field width is used, carry out the test rod check with the
minimum and maximum protective field width.
9. If multiple devices are connected with each other in a cascade, carry out the
entire test for each device of the cascade. During the field indicator test, watch the
device that is currently being checked.

4.5.2 Visual check of the machine and the protective device

The following points are often helpful for the definition of the check:
• Has the machine been retrofitted?
• Have machine parts been removed?
• Have modifications been made to the surroundings of the machine?
• Have the protective device or its parts been dismantled?
• Is it possible to enter the hazardous area without being detected?
• Is the protective device damaged?
• Is the protective device severely contaminated?
• Is the front screen contaminated, scratched or destroyed?
• Are there any damaged cables or open cable ends?
• Is the configuration of the protective device still the same?
If one of the points applies, the machine should be shut down immediately. In this
case, the machine and the protective device must be checked by appropriately qualified
safety personnel.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 93

Subject to change without notice
5 MOUNTING

5 Mounting
5.1 Unpacking
Procedure
1. Check the components for completeness and the integrity of all parts.
2. In the event of complaints, contact the responsible SICK subsidiary.

Further topics
• "Ordering information", page 204

5.2 Fitting the system plug

Overview
You must mount the system plug on the safety light curtain prior to starting mounting
and electrical installation work. Please note that depending on the application, the
system plug used at the sender may be different to that at the receiver.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Malfunctions can occur if the protective device is connected other than with one of the
system plugs provided.
► Use the system plugs provided.

NOTICE
Fitting the system plug
If the system plug is not fitted, electrostatic discharge at the contacts may damage the
device.
► Prevent electrostatic discharge at the contacts.
► Close the terminal compartment of the device with a protective cover.

NOTICE
Enclosure ratings IP 65 and IP67 only apply if the front connector is fitted.
If the system plug is not mounted, dirt, dust, or moisture may enter the device and
cause damage.
► Fitting the system plug.
► Prevent the entry of dirt, dust, and moisture.

NOTICE
The IP65 and IP67 enclosure ratings only apply if the protective cover for the DIP
switches, which is attached to the SP2 system plug, is securely closed.

Procedure
1. Make sure that the safety light curtain and system plug are disconnected from the
voltage supply while the system plug is being mounted.
2. Unpack the system plug.
3. Adjust the DIP switches as necessary.

94 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 MOUNTING 5

When using an SP2 system plug, open the protective cover for the DIP switches,
set the DIP switches, then securely close the protective cover again.
4. Remove the protective film from the terminal compartment of the safety light
curtain.
5. Carefully mount the system plug on the terminal compartment of the safety light
curtain.
6. Use the 2 captive screws to screw the system plug onto the safety light curtain.
Torque 0.5 Nm ± 0.1 Nm.

Figure 45: Fitting the system plug

5.3 Mounting
Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons or parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized or not recognized in
time in case of non-observance.
► Take into consideration the minimum distances calculated for the machine.
► Then, mount the safety light curtain such that it is not possible to reach over,
under or around, or to stand behind the safety light curtain, and that the light
curtain cannot be repositioned.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► The end with the cable connection must point in the same direction for the sender
and receiver.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 95

Subject to change without notice
5 MOUNTING

s r s r

180˚

Figure 46: Sender and receiver must not be installed such that they are rotated 180° relative to
each other

NOTE
Observe the following when mounting the brackets:
• Select an appropriate length for the screw to prevent any risk of injury from an
overrun.

Prerequisites
• Project planning is completed.
• Assembly is carried out according to the project planning.
• Dangerous condition of the machine is and remains switched off during mounting.
• The outputs of the device do not affect the machine during mounting.
• Only use SICK-approved brackets for mounting.
• Take appropriate measures for vibration damping if vibration and shock specifica‐
tions exceed the values and test conditions specified in the data sheet.

Mounting instructions
► Mount the sender and receiver on a level surface. (1)
1

► Mount the sender and receiver such that a right-angled protective field is estab‐
lished, i.e., when mounted vertically at the same height. (2)

96 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 MOUNTING 5

► For minor adjustments when aligning, the sender and receiver can be adjusted
longitudinally in the brackets.
2

90˚

s r

90˚

► Position the brackets near the ends of the housing. For devices with a protective
field height > 300 mm, the distance between the bracket and the end of the
housing must not exceed 1/4 of the length of the housing. If the device is exposed
to strong vibrations during operation, mount the top bracket at a height where the
offset in the safety light curtain housing rests on the bracket. (3)
3

► Observe the tightening torque details for the particular bracket. Higher torques
may damage the bracket. Lower torques do not offer sufficient protection against
slipping of the sender and receiver. (4)
4

5 Nm - 2,5 Nm -
6 Nm 3 Nm

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 97

Subject to change without notice
5 MOUNTING

► Make sure that the sender and receiver are aligned correctly. The optics of the
sender and the receiver must be located opposite one another. (5)
5

► If necessary, use a spirit level to check that the components are parallel. (6)
6

NOTE
If different system plugs are used on the sender and receiver, the bracket cannot be
mounted at the same height.

Further topics
• "Minimum distance of the safety light curtain to the hazardous point", page 30
• "Minimum distance from reflective surfaces", page 33
• "Aligning the sender and receiver", page 153

5.3.1 Mounting the QuickFix bracket

Overview
The sender and receiver are each mounted using at least 2 QuickFix brackets.
The QuickFix bracket consists of 2 individual parts that are pushed into each other.
The two individual parts are connected using an M5 screw, and the housing (sender or
receiver) is clamped with form-fit clamping.
The two mounting surfaces for the brackets of the sender or receiver must be parallel
and lie on the same plane.

98 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 MOUNTING 5

Important information

NOTE
The following should be considered when mounting the QuickFix bracket:
• When selecting the screw length, observe the wall thickness and the depth of the
countersunk screw of the QuickFix bracket.

NOTE
The QuickFix bracket has a cable guide. Depending on the installation, the cable guide
can make mounting easier.

Mounting the QuickFix bracket on a machine or profile frame

Table 32: Side and rear mounting with the QuickFix bracket
mounting Description
method
On the side 1) Fasten the M5 screw to the machine or profile frame through the QuickFix
bracket. A screw nut or threaded hole is required on the machine or profile
frame (1).
Fasten the M5 screw to the QuickFix bracket through the machine or profile
frame. A screw nut is required for each QuickFix bracket (2).
Fasten the M5 screw to the profile frame through the QuickFix bracket. A
sliding nut is required on the profile frame (3).
On the back Fasten the M5 screw to the machine or profile frame through the QuickFix
bracket. A screw nut or threaded hole is required on the machine or profile
frame (4).
1) If the bracket is attached at the side, no muting arms can be mounted on the protective device.

Tightening torque: 5 Nm … 6 Nm

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 99

Subject to change without notice
5 MOUNTING

1 4

a
b

a
b

Figure 47: Mounting the QuickFix bracket on a profile

Securing the sender and receiver in the bracket

1. Clamp the housing of the sender and receiver positively in the bracket.
2. Secure the position of the sender and receiver in the bracket using the M5 screw.
Torque: 2.5 Nm to 3 Nm

5.3.2 Mounting the FlexFix bracket

Overview
In the FlexFix bracket, the sender and receiver can be rotated ± 15° 6) around their
longitudinal axis.
2 FlexFix brackets are used to mount the sender and receiver.
As a rule, each FlexFix bracket is mounted to the flange plate with 2 screws. In excep‐
tional cases (e.g., reduced vibration and shock requirements), a FlexFix bracket can be
mounted with only one screw if this does not impair the function.

Important information

NOTICE
The housing of the safety light curtain can become scratched if the screw heads
protrude when the FlexFix brackets are mounted on the back.
This can be avoided by taking one of the following measures:
► Use flat-head screws with washers.
► If using cylinder head screws, use 2 screws per bracket and no washers.

6) If muting arms are attached to the sender and receiver, the units can be rotated by ± 5° around their longitudinal axis.

100 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 MOUNTING 5

NOTE
The FlexFix mounting kit (part number 2073543) contains 2 FlexFix brackets, one
alignment tool, and the required screws, sliding nuts, and washers.

Further topics
• "Brackets", page 207

5.3.2.1 Mounting the FlexFix bracket on a machine or profile frame

Important information

NOTE
When selecting the screw length, the wall thickness of the FlexFix bracket must be
taken into account.

Mounting the FlexFix bracket on a machine or profile frame

Table 33: Lateral and rear mounting with the FlexFix bracket
Mounting Description
method
On the side 1) With the M5 screw through the FlexFix bracket on the machine or profile
frame. A screw nut or threaded hole is required on the machine or profile
frame (1).
With the M5 screw through the FlexFix bracket on the profile frame. 2 sliding
nuts are required on the profile frame (2).
On the back With the M5 screw through the FlexFix bracket on the machine or profile
frame. A screw nut or threaded hole is required on the machine or profile
frame (3).
1) If the bracket is attached at the side, no muting arms can be mounted on the protective device.

Tightening torque: 5 Nm … 6 Nm

1 3

Figure 48: Mounting the FlexFix bracket to a profile frame

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 101

Subject to change without notice
5 MOUNTING

Securing the sender and receiver in the bracket

1. After mounting the FlexFix brackets, screw or carefully press the sender and
receiver into the FlexFix brackets from the front. (1)
2. Align the sender and receiver. (2)
3. Use an M5 screw to secure the position of the sender and receiver in the FlexFix
bracket. (3)
Torque: 2.5 Nm to 3 Nm

1 2 3

Figure 49: Inserting the safety light curtain in the FlexFix brackets

NOTE
The protective device can only be screwed in when both brackets are in alignment.
Recommendation:
1. Only hand-tighten the screws on the brackets at first.
2. Align the two brackets. To do this, place a straightedge or spirit level, for example,
on the screw mounting surfaces of the brackets that are not being used.
3. Tighten the screws.

Further topics
• "Aligning the sender and receiver", page 153
• "Brackets", page 207

5.3.2.2 Mounting the FlexFix bracket on the back of a device column

Overview
The FlexFix bracket can be mounted in the device column using sliding nuts.
For information about mounting on a device column, see the mounting instructions for
the respective device column.

Further topics
• "Device columns", page 214

102 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 MOUNTING 5

5.3.3 Mounting the replacement bracket

Overview
If an existing C4000 safety light curtain is mounted with a swivel-mount bracket or
with a side bracket, it can be replaced with a deTec4 safety light curtain using a
replacement bracket. There is no need to drill new holes, since the existing ones can be
used for the replacement bracket.

Complementary information
Additional information for mounting a safety light curtain with a replacement bracket
can be found in the mounting instructions for the replacement bracket.

Further topics
• "Brackets", page 207

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 103

Subject to change without notice
6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

6 Electrical installation
6.1 Security
Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to electrical voltage
Hazard due to unexpected starting of the machine
► Make sure that the machine is (and remains) disconnected from the voltage
supply during the electrical installation.
► Make sure that the dangerous state of the machine is (and remains) switched off
during electrical installation.
► Ensure that the outputs of the device have no effect on the machine during the
electrical installation work.
► Use a suitable voltage supply.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The dangerous state may not be stopped in the event of non-compliance.
► Always connect the two OSSDs separately. The two OSSDs must not be connected
to each other.
► Connect the OSSDs such that the machine controller processes both signals
separately.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The dangerous state may not be stopped in the event of non-compliance.
► Prevent the formation of a potential difference between the load and the protec‐
tive device.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Malfunctions can occur if unused inputs are wired incorrectly.
► Unused inputs must either not be connected or be permanently switched to LOW.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Malfunctions can occur if unused MFPs are wired incorrectly.
► Unused MFPs must not be connected.

104 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 6

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Malfunctions can occur if connections of the same type are wired incorrectly, e.g., if
connectors are mixed up.
► Make sure (e.g., by routing the cables appropriately) that connections of the same
type cannot be mixed up.
► After each change to the wiring, ensure that connections of the same type are
connected correctly.

NOTE
Use a separate sheathed cable for each M12 connection (exception: M12 connections
where wiring is provided via a T-connector).

Prerequisites
• The safety light curtain has been safely integrated into the control system and the
electrical system of the machine.
• The safety light curtain is voltage-free.
• Mounting has been completed correctly.
• Unused connections are fitted with protective caps.

Example: Isolated connection of OSSD1 and OSSD2

Figure 50: Dual-channel and isolated connection of OSSD1 and OSSD2

Avoiding any potential difference between load and protective device

If you connect loads to the output signal switching devices (switching outputs) that
then also switch if controlled with negative voltage (e.g., electro-mechanical contactor
without reverse polarity protection diode), you must connect the 0 V connections of
these loads and those of the corresponding protective device separately and also
directly to the same 0 V terminal strip. In the event of a fault, this is the only way to
ensure that there can be no potential difference between the 0 V connections of the
loads and those of the corresponding protective device.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 105

Subject to change without notice
6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 51: No potential difference between load and protective device

Further topics
• "Integration into the electrical control system", page 71
• "Technical data", page 188

6.2 System connection (M12, 5-pin)

2 1

3 4

Figure 52: System connection (male connector, M12, 5-pin)

Table 34: System connection pin assignment SP1 or SP2 (male connector, M12, 5-pin)
Pin Wire color 1) s Sender r Receiver
1 Brown +24 V DC (voltage supply +24 V DC (voltage supply
input) input)
2 White In2 OSSD1 (switching output 1)
Laser alignment aid push‐
button
3 Blue 0 V DC (voltage supply 0 V DC (voltage supply
input) input)
4 Black In1 OSSD2 (switching output 2)
Laser alignment aid switch
or cascade synchronization
input
5 2) Gray MFP1 MFP1
Single system or host: Single system or host:
Sender communication Sender communication /
Guest: communication with
Cascade communication extension module
Guest:
Cascade communication
1) Applies to the connecting cables recommended as accessories.
2) If the sender and the receiver are not connected, pin 5 can remain unassigned for a single system or
host and, for example, a 4-pin cable with a 4-pin female connector can be used.

Further topics
• "Integration into the electrical control system", page 71

106 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 6

6.3 System connection (M12, 8-pin)

2 1
8
3 7
4
5 6
Figure 53: System connection (male connector M12, 8-pin)

Table 35: Pin assignment of SP1 or SP2 system connection (male connector, M12, 8-pin)
Pin Wire color 1) s Sender r Receiver
1 White Not assigned In3
Reset
or override 2)
or reset/override 2)
or belt stop 3)
or muting release 3)
or switching from partial muting
to muting 3)
2 Brown +24 V DC (voltage supply input) +24 V DC (voltage supply input)
3 Green Not assigned MFP3
ADO (application diagnostic out‐
put)
4 Yellow Not assigned In4
EDM
or muting signal 1 2)
or belt stop 3)
or muting release 3)
or switching from partial muting
to muting 3)
5 Gray In2 OSSD1 (switching output 1)
Laser alignment aid pushbutton
6 Pink In1 OSSD2 (switching output 2)
Laser alignment aid switch
or cascade synchronization
input
7 Blue 0 V DC (voltage supply input) 0 V DC (voltage supply input)
8 Red MFP1 MFP1
Single system or host: Single system or host:
Sender communication Sender communication /
Guest: communication with exten‐
Cascade communication sion module
Guest:
Cascade communication
1) Applies to the connecting cables recommended as accessories.
2) Only available via software configuration (with SP1 or SP2) or via configuration on SP2.
3) Only available via software configuration (with SP1 or SP2).

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 107

Subject to change without notice
6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Table 36: Pin assignment of system connection on the extension module (M12 plug, 8-pin)
Pin Wire color 1) Function
1 White In3 2)
Reset
or override
or reset/override
or belt stop
or muting release
or switching from partial muting to muting
2 Brown +24 V DC (voltage supply input)
3 Green MFP3 2)
ADO (application diagnostic output)
4 Yellow In4 2)
EDM
or muting signal 1
or belt stop
or muting release
or switching from partial muting to muting
5 Gray OSSD1 (switching output 1)
6 Pink OSSD2 (switching output 2)
7 Blue 0 V DC (voltage supply input)
8 Red In17 3)
Belt stop
1) Applies to the connecting cables recommended as accessories.
2) Not available if the extension module is connected via a 5-pin adapter (on the system connection of the
extension module, or when connecting the extension module to the receiver).
3) Not available if the extension module is connected via a 5-pin adapter (on the system connection of the
extension module).

Further topics
• "Integration into the electrical control system", page 71

6.4 Extension connection (M12, 5-pin)

1 2

4 3

Figure 54: Extension connection (female connector M12, 5-pin)

Table 37: Pin assignment of SP1 or SP2 extension connection (female connector, M12, 5-pin)
Pin Wire color 1) s Sender r Receiver
1 Brown 24 V Out (voltage supply 24 V Out (voltage supply output) 2)
output) 2)

108 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 6

Pin Wire color 1) s Sender r Receiver

2 White Not assigned In1
Single system:
EDM 3)
or muting signal 1 4)
or muting release 5)
or switching from partial muting to mut‐
ing 5)
Host or first of 2 guests:
OSSD input
Last guest:
EDM
3 Blue 0 V Out (voltage supply out‐ 0 V Out (voltage supply output)
put)
4 Black Sync-Out (cascade synchro‐ In2
nization output, SP1 only) Single system:
Reset
or override 5)
or reset/override 5)
or muting signal 2 4)
or muting release 5)
or switching from partial muting to mut‐
ing 5)
Host or first of 2 guests:
OSSD input
Last guest:
Reset
5 Gray MFP2 (cascade communi‐ MFP2
cation, SP1 only) Single system or last guest:
ADO (application diagnostic output)
or IO-Link
Host or first of 2 guests:
Cascade communication
1) Applies to the connecting cables recommended as accessories.
2) Only for cascading deTec devices or for connecting suitable devices which are specified as accessories.
3) For configuration via the SP2 system plug: When muting is configured, EDM is not possible on the
extension connection.
4) Only available via software configuration (with SP1 or SP2) or via configuration on SP2.
5) Only available via software configuration (with SP1 or SP2).

Complementary information
Two signals (e.g., for muting sensors) can be connected to the extension connection
using the muting connector or the IO-Link connector.

Further topics
• "Integration into the electrical control system", page 71

6.5 Additional connections on the DMM4 extension module

1 2

4 3

Figure 55: Additional connections on the DMM4 extension module (female connector, M12,
5-pin)

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 109

Subject to change without notice
6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Table 38: Pin assignment of A1, A2, B1, B2 connections (DMM4, female connector, M12, 5-pin)
Pin Wire color 1) A1 A2 B1 B2
1 Brown +24 V DC (voltage supply output)
2 White Not assigned
3 Blue 0 V DC (voltage supply output)
4 Black In5 In6 In7 In8
Muting signal Muting signal Muting signal Muting signal
5 Gray Not assigned
1) Applies to the connecting cables recommended as accessories.

Table 39: Pin assignment of X1, X2, X3 connections (DMM4, female connector, M12, 5-pin)
Pin Wire color 1) X1 X2 X3
1 Brown +24 V DC (voltage supply output)
2 White In9 In11 or DO2 In13
Override ADO (application diagnostic Operating mode selection
or input for safety sensors output) or input for safety sensors
(SDI) or input for safety sensors (SDI)
(SDI)
3 Blue 0 V DC (voltage supply output)
4 Black In10 In12 In14
Reset Switching from partial mut‐ Operating mode selection
or override ing to muting or or input for safety sensors
or reset/override muting enable or (SDI)
or switching from partial input for safety sensors (SDI)
muting to muting
or muting release
or input for safety sensors
(SDI)
5 Gray DO1 Not assigned In15
ADO (application diagnostic Operating mode selection
output)
1) Applies to the connecting cables recommended as accessories.

110 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

7 Configuration
7.1 Security

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Changes to the configuration and the use of service functions by unauthorized persons
can result in the dangerous state not being ended or not being ended in time.
► Ensure that unauthorized persons cannot gain access to the devices via Safety
Designer or the SICK Safety Assistant app.
► Ensure that unauthorized persons cannot make any changes to the system and its
configuration, e.g., via system plugs.

NOTICE
When you log into a device, the configuration software stores the password so that you
do not need to re-enter it for other configuration steps.
If you do not change any other settings in the login dialog, the password is deleted as
soon as you exit the configuration software, or log out in the main window or Device
window.
If you enable the Temporarily store password for login on additional devices. function, the
password will be retained even if you log out in the device window only.
If you leave the computer unattended, you must log off to prevent unwanted access to
the device.

NOTICE
The computer used for configuration must be protected against unintentional interfer‐
ence or modification (e.g. by anti-virus software and firewall).

When using Safety Designer or the SICK Safety Assistant app, assign a unique device
name to each system to prevent confusion.
Change the default password for all devices during commissioning. The devices in a
system use the same password. When a password is changed, the password for all
connected devices in the system is changed.
If devices are connected to a system for which a password has already been changed,
all connected devices in the system must have been changed to the same password.
If the configuration is restored automatically, the passwords are also restored.

7.2 Overview
Overview
The following options are available for configuration:
• Configuration via the SP1 or SP2 system plug (including automatic configuration of
external device monitoring (EDM), cascades, or application diagnostic outputs, for
example)
• Software configuration in Safety Designer via a connected extension module
For devices that were previously configured using the DIP switches, you can switch to
the software configuration without resetting the devices to the factory settings. To do
this, read out the previous configuration of the device (including guest devices in a
cascade) in the software and then make the desired changes.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 111

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

If you only use functions that are also available with function package SP1 or SP2,
you can use the extension module for software configuration and remove it again
after transferring the configuration. This allows you, for example, to change the default
settings for muting.

Further topics
• "System plug", page 17
• "Extension module", page 18

7.3 Factory settings

Overview
A device that has the factory settings can be configured via the system plug or via the
Safety Designer (software configuration).
Table 40: Factory settings of the configurable functions
Function Factory setting
Beam coding Uncoded
Restart interlock Not configured
Smart restart interlock Not configured
External device monitoring (EDM) Not configured
Application diagnostic output Weak signal
Cascading Single system
Smart presence detection Not configured
Reduced resolution (Basic) Not configured
Protective field width Automatic calibration of the protective field
width
Transmitting power Depends on the sender variant:
• Sender with small scanning range:
Reduced transmitting power
• All other senders: Full transmitting power
Muting Not configured
Partial muting Not configured
Smart Box Detection Not configured
Operating mode selection Not configured
Multiple sampling Double sampling
Inputs for safety sensors (SDI) Not configured
IO-Link Activated (diagnostics only)

Complementary information
The device must be reset to the factory settings in the following cases:
• The configuration type is changed from software configuration to configuration via
system plug.
• The device was previously operated with an SP2 system plug and used functions
of the SP2 function package and will now be operated with an SP1 system plug.
• One of the following functions is changed during configuration via system plug:
° External device monitoring (EDM)
° Restart interlock
° Cascading
• The device is to be used as a replacement device (device replacement).

112 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

All other functions configured via DIP switches will be reset to the factory settings by
setting the DIP switches to Off.
The following options are available for resetting a device to the factory settings:
• DIP switch on system plug
• Safety Designer
• SICK Safety Assistant app
Resetting to factory settings has the following effects:
• The configurable functions are reset to their factory settings.
• The Maintenance and Authorized Client user groups are deactivated.
• The password for the Administrator user group is reset to the factory settings.
• The error memory is cleared.
Further topics
• "Reset to factory settings", page 147
• "Service functions of the mobile app", page 147
• "Resetting to factory settings via DIP switches", page 129

7.4 Configuration mode

If a device detects a permissible change to the configuration, the device switches to
configuration mode. In configuration mode, the OSSDs are in the OFF state.
Table 41: Configuration mode
Sender Receiver
Configuration mode is active • When resetting the sender • When resetting the receiver
to the factory settings to the factory settings
• A permissible change of • A permissible change of
cascading was discovered cascading was discovered
during switch-on during switch-on
• After replacing the device • A permissible change to the
(sender), the configuration external device monitoring
was restored and transfer‐ configuration has been dis‐
red to the replacement covered during switch-on
device. • The reset pushbutton was
pressed in order to config‐
ure the restart interlock fol‐
lowing switch-on
• After replacing the device
(receiver or extension mod‐
ule1), the configuration was
restored and transferred to
the replacement device.
Display of the configuration • Field indicator: Ö Green • Field indicator: Ö Green
mode • STATE LED: O Red • OSSD LED: O Red

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

1 Configuration mode cannot be displayed on the extension module. The receiver therefore displays the
configuration mode when the configuration on the extension module has been restored.

If you have configured the device via system plugs, you can make further changes to
the configuration during configuration mode:
• Configuring the restart interlock
Quit configuration mode
► Briefly interrupt the voltage supply, then switch it back on.
► When all devices are in configuration mode: Start the application (via Safety
Designer or the SICK Safety Assistant app).7).
► Perform a device restart (via Safety Designer or the SICK Safety Assistant app).7).

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 113

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

7.5 Configuration via system plug

Overview
The configuration via the system plug is carried out on the DIP switches of the SP1 or
SP2 system plug.
When configuring via the system plug, no software configuration must be saved. If
necessary, the system must be reset to the factory settings.
When using the extension module for diagnostics, no other software configuration
may be stored in the configuration memory of the extension module. If necessary, the
extension module must be reset to the factory settings.
For cascades: The configuration of the host devices is applied to the guest devices. The
DIP switches of the guest devices are ignored.
In addition, the following functions can be configured automatically:
• Restart interlock
• External device monitoring (EDM)
• Cascading
• Application diagnostic output (ADO)
After changing the automatic configuration, the device switches to configuration mode.
Configuration changes to the DIP switches (e.g., beam coding), on the other hand, are
applied directly.

Functions and their configuration type

Table 42: Functions and their configuration type
Function Configuration type
Muting DIP switch
Partial muting
Manual adjustment of the protective field
width
Reduced resolution (Basic)
Smart presence detection
Beam coding
Smart Box Detection
Reset to factory settings
Restart interlock Automatic configuration
External device monitoring (EDM)
Cascading
Application diagnostic output

7) A connection between the sender and receiver is required to restart the device or to start the sender application

114 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

DIP switch on SP1 and SP2

1 2 3 4
A
OFF

1 2 3 4
B
OFF

1 2 3 4
C
1 2 OFF

1 2
ON

ON
D

OFF ON OFF ON
uncoded uncoded
code 1 code 1
code 2 code 2
rev.conf. rev.conf.

Figure 56: SP1 system plug with 2 DIP Figure 57: SP2 system plug with 14 DIP
switches switches

Table 43: Overview of DIP switches

Row DIP switch Function
A 1)
1, 2, 3, 4 Muting, see "Configuring muting", page 118
B 1)
1, 2 Scanning range adjustment, see "Configuring
the protective field width", page 120
3, 4 Reduced resolution, see "Configuring reduced
resolution (Basic)", page 121
C 1) 1 Smart presence detection, see "Configuring
smart presence detection", page 122
2 Not assigned
3 Smart Box Detection 2), see "Configuring Smart
Box Detection", page 123
4 Parity, see "Checking the parity", page 124
D 1, 2 • Beam coding, see "Configuring beam cod‐
ing", page 117
• Reset to factory settings, see "Resetting to
factory settings via DIP switches", page 129
1) Only applies to SP2 system plug.
2) On receivers with functional scope V 1.0.0, DIP switch 3 is not assigned.

Configuration information
► When using an SP2 system plug, leave all unused DIP switches in the OFF state.
Otherwise a configuration fault is output.
► Check the parity using the SP2 system plug after setting the DIP switches. The
sum of the DIP switches of rows A, B and C set to On must be even. In case of an
uneven sum, change the setting of DIP switch 4 (row C).

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 115

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

► Securely close the protective cover for the DIP switches, which is attached to the
SP2 system plug.
► Then ensure the correct functioning of the device.

Complementary information
If the device uses functions of an SP1 system plug and then an SP2 system plug
is connected, the device retains the settings and continues to operate as with the
previous system plug.

7.5.1 Possible combinations of functions on SP2 system plug

Table 44: Possible combinations of functions on SP2 system plug
Function

Manual adjustment of the protective field width

Reduced resolution (Basic)
Smart presence detection
Restart interlock (In2)

Restart interlock (In3)

Smart Box Detection

Muting (In1, In2)

Muting (In2, In4)

Partial muting
Beam coding

Cascading
EDM (In1)

EDM (In4)

Beam coding – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Restart interlock at extension ✓ – – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
connection (In2)
Restart interlock at system ✓ – – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
connection (In3)
External device monitoring ✓ ✓ ✓ – – ✓ ✓ – – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(EDM) at extension connec‐
tion (In1)
External device monitoring ✓ ✓ ✓ – – ✓ ✓ ✓ – ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(EDM) at the system connec‐
tion (In4)
Cascading ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – ✓ – – – – ✓ ✓
Smart presence detection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – – – ✓ ✓
Muting at the extension con‐ ✓ – ✓ – ✓ – – – – ✓ – ✓ ✓
nection (In1, In2)
Muting at extension connec‐ ✓ – ✓ – – – – – – ✓ – ✓ ✓
tion In2 and at system con‐
nection In4
Partial muting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – ✓ ✓ – – – ✓
Smart Box Detection ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – – – – – – ✓ ✓
Reduced resolution (Basic) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ – ✓ – ✓
Manual adjustment of the ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ –
protective field width
✓ Functions can be combined with each other.
– Functions cannot be combined with each other.
1) Smart Box Detection and beam coding (code 1 and code 2) can be combined up to a maximum protective field height of 1650 mm.

116 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

7.5.2 Configuring beam coding

Overview
The beam coding “uncoded” allows for particularly short response times.
To protect against interference from systems in close proximity to each other, code 1
and code 2 must be used.
The beam coding must be the same for the sender and receiver.
In a cascade, the beam coding is set on the sender and receiver of the host device and
applied to all guest devices. Deviating settings for the guest devices are ignored.

Configuring beam coding

The beam coding is configured using 2 DIP switches. The DIP switches are located on
the inside of the system plug.

1 2

ON
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 58: Configuring beam coding

Table 45: DIP switches and beam coding

DIP switch 1 (row D) DIP switch 2 (row D) Function
Off Off Uncoded (fast response time,
factory setting)
On Off Code 1 (protection against
interference from systems in
close proximity to each other)
Off On Code 2 (protection against
interference with systems in
close proximity to each other)
On On Reset to factory settings

The beam coding is indicated when the product is switched on:

• Uncoded: the field indicator does not flash yellow
• Code 1: the field indicator flashes yellow once
• Code 2: the field indicator flashes yellow twice
• Field indicator lights up yellow for 3 seconds: software configuration is active. The
beam coding cannot be determined from the DIP switch positions.

Complementary information
You can also change the beam coding later. You do not need to reset the product to the
factory settings to do this.
Beam coding does not have to be taken into account for the parity test.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 117

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Further topics
• "Protection against interference from systems in close proximity to each other",
page 36
• "Factory settings", page 112

7.5.3 Configuring muting

Overview
Muting is configured via the DIP switches 1 ... 4 (row A) on the receiver of a single
system.
Depending on arrangement of the muting sensors, cross-muting or exit monitoring can
be configured and the ESPE protection can be temporarily bypassed. In combination
with partial muting, the safety can be increased by having the topmost beam (far from
system plug) remain active during a valid muting condition.
In addition, a muting signal can be routed from the extension connection of the receiver
to the 8-pin system connection. EDM is then not possible on either the system or the
extension connection.

Important information

NOTE
Muting can only be configured on the receiver of a single system.

Prerequisites
• SP2 system plug

Configuring muting

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
A
OFF
OFF
1 2 3 4
B
OFF

1 2 3 4
C
OFF
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 59: DIP switch for muting on the SP2 system plug

Table 46: DIP switch and muting

DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 DIP switch 4 Function
(row A) (row A) (row A) (row A)
Off Off Off Off Muting deactivated
(delivery condition)

118 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 DIP switch 4 Function

(row A) (row A) (row A) (row A)
Off On Off Off Cross muting
Off On Off On Cross-muting with muting
signal 1 on system con‐
nection In4 and muting
signal 2 on extension
connection In2
Off On On Off Partial muting based on
cross muting
Off On On On Partial muting based on
cross muting with muting
signal 1 on the In4 sys‐
tem connection and mut‐
ing signal 2 on the In2
extension connection
On Off Off Off Exit monitoring
On Off Off On Exit monitoring with mut‐
ing signal 1 on system
connection In4 and mut‐
ing signal 2 on extension
connection In2
On Off On Off Partial muting based on
exit monitoring
On Off On On Partial muting based on
exit monitoring with mut‐
ing signal 1 on the In4
system connection and
muting signal 2 on the
In2 extension connection

The following muting parameters are fixed by configuring muting on the SP2 system
plug.
Table 47: Settings depending on the muting variant
Muting parameters Values for exit monitoring Values for cross muting
Override Active Active
Successive overrides 5 5
Sensor gap monitoring (muting sig‐ 0.5 s 0.5 s
nal)
Sensor gap monitoring (ESPE) 0.5 s -
Muting end delay 0.2 s -
Muting hold time 4s -
Muting end condition ESPE Muting signals
Concurrence monitoring 24 h 24 h
Total muting time 24 h 24 h

Note on configuration
► Check the parity after setting the DIP switch, see "Checking the parity", page 124.

Complementary information
The following applies to cross-muting:
• Override is active. The number of consecutive override statuses is limited to 5.
• Concurrence monitoring is configured.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 119

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

• A total muting time is active.

• Cross muting is ended if one of the muting sensors remains clear for longer than
0.5 s, i.e., the sensor gap monitoring (muting sensor) has been exceeded.
The following is true for exit monitoring:
• Override is active. The number of consecutive override statuses is limited to 5.
• Concurrence monitoring is configured.
• A total muting time is active.
• The Muting end by ESPE function is active.
• Exit monitoring is ended when the ESPE is clear for longer than 0.5 s and a muting
end delay of 0.2 s has elapsed.
• When a muting sensor becomes clear, the sensor gap monitoring will expire, i.e., a
muting sensor may not be clear longer than 0.5 s.
• If the sensor gap monitoring (muting sensor) of 0.5 s has been exceeded, muting
ends after a muting hold time of 4 s.

Further topics
• "Muting", page 41

7.5.4 Configuring the protective field width

Important information

NOTE
The protective field width is only configured on the receiver of a single or host system.

Prerequisites
• SP2 system plug

Configuring the protective field width

The protective field width of the safety light curtain is configured using DIP switches 1
and 2 (row B) on the system plug of the receiver.
The protective field width configuration is applied to all guest devices in a cascade.

1 2 3 4
A
OFF

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
B
OFF
OFF
1 2 3 4
C
OFF
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 60: DIP switch for the protective field widths on the SP2 system plug

120 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Table 48: DIP switches and scanning range

DIP switch 1 (row B) DIP switch 2 (row B) Function
Off Off Automatic calibration of the
protective field width (delivery
condition)
Off On Manual protective field width
(small range)
On Off Manual protective field width
(medium range)
On On Manual protective field width
(large range)

Note on configuration
► Check the parity after setting the DIP switch, see "Checking the parity", page 124.

Further topics
• "Scanning range and protective field width", page 27

7.5.5 Configuring reduced resolution (Basic)

Important information

NOTE
Reduced resolution is only configured on the receiver of a single or host system.

Prerequisites
• SP2 system plug

Configuring reduced resolution (Basic)

Reduced resolution is configured using DIP switches 3 and 4 (row B) on the system plug
of the receiver.
The reduced resolution configuration is applied to all guest devices in a cascade.

1 2 3 4
A
OFF

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
B
OFF
OFF
1 2 3 4
C
OFF
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 61: DIP switch for reduced resolution on SP2 system plug

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 121

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Table 49: DIP switches and reduced resolution

DIP switch 3 (row B) DIP switch 4 (row B) Function
Off Off Reduced resolution deacti‐
vated (factory setting)
Off On 1 beam
On Off 2 beams
On On Not allowed

Note on configuration
► Check the parity after setting the DIP switch, see "Checking the parity", page 124.

Further topics
• "Reduced resolution", page 40

7.5.6 Configuring smart presence detection

Important information

NOTE
Smart presence detection is only configured on the receiver of a host system.

Prerequisites
• SP2 system plug
• Cascade

Configuring smart presence detection

Smart presence detection is configured using DIP switch 1 (row C) on the system plug
of the receiver.
The smart presence detection configuration applied to all guest devices in a cascade.

1 2 3 4
A
OFF

1 2 3 4
B
OFF

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C
OFF
OFF
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 62: DIP switch for smart presence detection on SP2 system plug

122 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Table 50: DIP switch and smart presence detection

DIP switch 1 (row C) Function
Off Smart presence detection deactivated (deliv‐
ery condition)
On Smart presence detection active

Note on configuration
► Check the parity after setting the DIP switch, see "Checking the parity", page 124.

Further topics
• "Smart presence detection", page 84

7.5.7 Configuring Smart Box Detection

Overview
Smart Box Detection is configured via DIP switch 3 (row C) on the receiver of a single
system.

Important information

NOTE
Smart Box Detection can only be configured on the receiver of a single system.

Prerequisites
• SP2 system plug
• Single device with a resolution of 14 mm

Configuring Smart Box Detection

1 2 3 4
A
OFF

1 2 3 4
B
OFF

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C
OFF
OFF
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 63: DIP switch for Smart Box Detection on SP2 system plug

Table 51: DIP switch and Smart Box Detection

DIP switch 3 (row C) Function
Off Smart Box Detection deactivated (delivery
state)

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 123

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

DIP switch 3 (row C) Function

On Smart Box Detection active

Note on configuration
► Check the parity after setting the DIP switch, see "Checking the parity", page 124.

Further topics
• "Smart Box Detection", page 59

7.5.8 Checking the parity

The parity must be checked after setting the DIP switches. The parity specifies whether
the sum of the DIP switches set to On is even or uneven.
Parity is only calculated for the DIP switches of rows A, B and C. DIP switches 1 and 2 of
row D are not included.
The parity is set using DIP switch 4 (row C).

1 2 3 4
A
OFF

1 2 3 4
B
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C
OFF
OFF
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 64: DIP switch for parity on SP2 system plug

Prerequisites
• SP2 system plug

Procedure
► Add the DIP switches of rows A, B and C that are set to On.
° If the sum of the DIP switches is even, keep the setting of DIP switch 4.
° If the sum of the DIP switches is uneven, change the setting of DIP switch 4.
Example
Partial muting based on cross muting and beam coding (code 1) was configured on one
device. DIP switch 4 is in the OFF state.
► Sum of the DIP switches (rows A ... C) that are set to ON = 2.
DIP switches 1 and 2 (row D) for the beam coding are not included.
✓ The sum of the DIP switch is even.
► The setting of DIP switch 4 (row C) stays in the OFF state.

124 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

7.5.9 Configuring the restart interlock

Prerequisites
• A reset pushbutton is connected
• The device is not in the override or override required status

Procedure

NOTE
Skip the first and second steps if the device is already in configuration mode.

1. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.

2. Switch on the voltage supply, then continue with the next step within 30 s.
If more than 30 s elapses, start with step 1 again.
3. Press the reset pushbutton for between 1 and 3 s, then release it.
If the reset pushbutton is pressed for more than 3 s, start with step 1 again.
✓ The device is in configuration mode, the field indicator flashes green.
✓ Diagnostic LED 4 flashes white and signals that the restart interlock has been
configured.
✓ The restart interlock is configured. The reset pushbutton must remain at the
connection to which it was connected during configuration.
4. When using the device in a cascade, wait until all receivers concerned indicate the
correct cascade configuration. In a cascade, diagnostic LED 2 flashes.
5. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.
✓ The device can now be put into operation.
To deactivate the restart interlock, reset the receiver to the factory settings.

Complementary information
In the factory settings, restart interlock is deactivated.
If muting is configured, the same pushbutton is used for reset and override. The
pushbutton must be connected to the 8-pin system connection.
When the restart interlock is configured, the application diagnostic output located on
the same plug connector as the reset pushbutton signals when the reset pushbutton
needs to be pressed. The application diagnostic output signals “reset required” and
periodically switches between the HIGH and LOW state so a connected suitable lamp
flashes.
If you connect a device with factory settings in a cascade with a device for which a
restart interlock is configured, the unconfigured device adopts the configuration of the
restart interlock from the configured device.

Further topics
• "Factory settings", page 112
• "Restart interlock", page 73

7.5.10 Configuring external device monitoring (EDM)

Prerequisites
• The external device monitoring can only be configured if the wiring has been
carried out correctly.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 125

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Procedure
1. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.
2. Make sure that the wiring has been performed correctly and that the contactor has
dropped out so that 24 V is present at the EDM input when the device is switched
on.
3. Switch on the voltage supply.
✓ The device is in configuration mode, the field indicator flashes green.
✓ Diagnostic LED 1 flashes white and signals that the external device monitoring has
been configured.
✓ External device monitoring is active. The wiring must remain at the connection to
which it was connected during configuration.
4. If necessary: to configure the restart interlock, press the reset pushbutton for
between 1 and 3 s, then release it. If diagnostic LED 4 flashes white, the restart
interlock has been configured.
5. When using the device in a cascade, wait until all receivers concerned indicate the
correct cascade configuration. In a cascade, diagnostic LED 2 flashes.
6. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.
✓ The device can now be put into operation.
To deactivate the external device monitoring, reset the receiver to the factory settings.

Complementary information
External device monitoring is deactivated in the factory settings.

Further topics
• "External device monitoring (EDM)", page 76
• "Factory settings", page 112

7.5.11 Configuring application diagnostic output

Overview
The application diagnostic outputs are configured automatically:
The following signals can be output over the application diagnostic output:
• Reset required
• Weak signal
• Ignored object
• Muting status
• Override required
• Valid object for Smart Box Detection
A signal can be output on both the system and extension connections.

Table 52: Output signals on the system connection and extension connection
Configured function Output signal on the application Output signal on the application
diagnostic output of the system diagnostic output of the extension
connection connection
Factory settings Weak signal 1) Weak signal 1)
Reduced resolution Ignored object 2) Weak signal 1)
Restart interlock with Reset required Weak signal 1)
reset pushbutton on
the system connection
Restart interlock with Weak signal 1) Reset required
reset pushbutton on
the extension connec‐
tion

126 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Configured function Output signal on the application Output signal on the application
diagnostic output of the system diagnostic output of the extension
connection connection
Restart interlock with Ignored object 2) Reset required
reset pushbutton on
the extension connec‐
tion and reduced reso‐
lution
Muting on In1 and In2 Override required Muting status or override required
Muting on In2 and In4 Muting status or override required Muting status or override required
Muting on In1 and In2 Reset required or override Muting status or reset required or
and restart interlock required override required
with reset pushbutton
on the system connec‐
tion
Muting on In2 and In4 Muting status or reset required or Muting status or reset required or
and restart interlock override required override required
with reset pushbutton
on the system connec‐
tion
Smart Box Detection Override required Valid object required for Smart
Box Detection or Override
Smart Box Detection Reset required or override Valid object for Smart Box Detec‐
and restart interlock required tion or Reset required or Override
with reset pushbutton required
on the system connec‐
tion
Smart Box Detection Valid object for Smart Box Detec‐ Reset required
and restart interlock tion or Reset required or Override
with reset pushbutton required
on the extension con‐
nection
1) A weak signal is only signaled if no other output signal is configured on the respective application
diagnostic output.
2) An ignored object is only signaled if neither a restart interlock on the system connection nor muting are
configured.

Further topics
• "Application diagnostic output", page 77
• "Output signals", page 78

7.5.12 Configuring cascading

Overview
You can use cascading to connect up to 3 safety light curtains, e.g., to provide presence
detection. The connected devices act like a long safety light curtain. Only one device,
the host, is connected to the control cabinet. The second device, guest 1, is connected
to the host. The third device, guest 2, is connected to guest 1.

Configuring cascading
No more than 3 systems can be connected in a cascade.
You can connect devices with factory settings. The devices recognize automatically that
they are part of a cascade.
Devices that are already configured and are to be connected in a cascade must be
reset to the factory settings.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 127

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Each device detects the number of devices in the cascade when it is switched on.
During configuration, the device stores this information in the configuration memory.
The information stored about the cascade is used to identify inadvertent or intentional
changes that could lead to a danger:
• If fewer devices are detected in the cascade when it is switched on than were
stored in the configuration, every device in the cascade switches to the locking
status
• If more devices are detected in the cascade when it is switched on than were
stored in the configuration, every device in the cascade updates its configuration
memory to the new value

Further topics
• "Cascading", page 83
• "Connecting preconfigured devices in an existing cascade", page 129

7.5.12.1 Cascading new devices

Procedure
1. Install and wire the devices.
2. Set the DIP switches on the receiver of the host system.
3. Switch on the voltage supply.
✓ The devices are in configuration mode, the field indicator flashes green.
4. Wait until all receivers indicate the correct cascade configuration. In a cascade,
diagnostic LED 2 flashes.
5. Wait approx. 3 s longer.
6. Receiver: to configure the restart interlock, press the reset pushbutton for
between 1 and 3 s, then release it. Diagnostic LED 4 flashes.
7. Disconnect the devices from the voltage supply.
✓ The cascade can now be put into operation.

Further topics
• "Configuring beam coding", page 117

7.5.12.2 Connecting a new device in an existing cascade

Overview
If you use a device with factory settings to extend a cascade or to replace a (defective)
device in a cascade, the device with factory settings adopts the configuration for the
restart interlock and external device monitoring from the existing devices.

Procedure
1. Install and wire the device.
2. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the receiver of the host system.
3. Switch on the voltage supply.
✓ The device is in configuration mode, the field indicator flashes green.
4. If the restart interlock or external device monitoring was configured for at least one
existing device, the configuration is adopted.
5. Wait until all receivers indicate the correct cascade configuration. In a cascade,
diagnostic LED 2 flashes.
6. Wait approx. 3 s longer.
7. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.
✓ The device can now be put into operation.

128 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Further topics
• "Resetting to factory settings via DIP switches", page 129
• "Automatic restoration of the configuration when a device is replaced", page 149
• "Configuring beam coding", page 117

7.5.12.3 Connecting preconfigured devices in an existing cascade

If you use a device that may already have been configured to extend a cascade or to
replace a (defective) device in a cascade, reset the device to the factory settings first.

Further topics
• "Resetting to factory settings via DIP switches", page 129
• "Connecting a new device in an existing cascade", page 128
• "Configuring beam coding", page 117

7.5.13 Resetting to factory settings via DIP switches

Overview
The sender and receiver can be reset to the factory settings independently of each
other via their DIP switches.

1 2

ON
1 2

ON

OFF ON
uncoded
code 1
code 2
rev.conf.

Figure 65: Reset to factory settings

Procedure
1. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.
2. Disconnect the device from all connected devices.
3. To reset the device to factory settings, set DIP switches 1 and 2 (row D) to ON, see
figure 65.
4. Switch on the voltage supply and disconnect it again within 10 s. 8) During this
time, the field indicator flashes alternately yellow and green.
5. Set DIP switches 1 and 2 (row D) to Off.
6. Switch on the voltage supply.
✓ The field indicator and the integrated signal lamp on the receiver (optional) flash
green.
✓ Sender: the STATE LED lights up red.
✓ Receiver: the OSSD LED lights up red.
✓ The device is reset to the factory settings.
✓ If the devices are connected in a cascade, the cascading is reconfigured.
✓ If there is a 24 V voltage present at the EDM input, the EDM is reactivated.
7. Disconnect the device from the voltage supply.

8) If the supply voltage is present for longer than 10 s, the safety light curtain changes to the locking status. Start again from step 1.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 129

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Complementary information
In a cascade, only the host device needs to be reset. The guest devices take on those
settings.
If the sender and receiver are connected to each other, only the receiver of the host
device needs to be reset. The sender of the host device and all other guest devices
take on those settings.
If an extension module is connected and contains a configuration, this configuration
is not reset when resetting to factory settings via DIP switches. After a restart, the
configuration of the extension module is applied again.

Further topics
• "Factory settings", page 112

7.6 Configuration via Safety Designer

Overview
The ESPE is configured using the Safety Designer configuration software.
The following conditions apply to configuration via Safety Designer:
• For operation with a software configuration, all DIP switches on the single device
or host in a cascade must be set to Off. The DIP switches of the guest devices in a
cascade are ignored.
• After a software configuration has been transferred to a device, the automatic
configuration of functions via a system plug is deactivated. If you add another
guest to a cascade, for example, you must also configure that guest in Safety
Designer.

Device selection in Safety Designer

Different devices and systems can be configured in Safety Designer via the device
catalog.
The "deTec/deTem system" device is used to configure the ESPE.
You do not configure individual devices, but rather the entire system consisting of all
devices of the ESPE and the extension module.

7.6.1 Safety Designer configuration software

For information on the Safety Designer, see the operating instructions for the Safety
Designer item no. 8018178.

7.6.1.1 Device window

The device window contains all device-specific settings, data and functions for the
selected device (deTec/deTem system). The device window has a similar user interface
to the main window of Safety Designer.
You can switch between the different areas via the main navigation menu:
• Overview: Here you can check the most important information as well as the meas‐
urement data and the current status of the system (see "Overview", page 134).
• Configuration: Here you can configure the system on various sub-pages (see "Con‐
figuring the system", page 134).
• Report: Here you can display the project planned configuration (see "Report",
page 145).

130 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

• Service: Here you can restart the devices of the system, reset to the factory
settings, activate the laser alignment aid, or manage the user passwords (see
"Service", page 146).
• Diagnostics: Here you can display the messages from the devices of the system,
view the status of the beams, record data, or view stored recordings (see "Diagnos‐
tics using Safety Designer", page 182).

7.6.1.2 Working with configurations

Overview
A configuration is the compilation of all parameters and values that you can set for a
system (single system or a cascade). The configuration is saved on the computer as a
configuration file or transferred to the devices of the system.
You always use Safety Designer to create and change a configuration. You can config‐
ure a system online or offline.
The user groups activated for a system and their passwords are not part of the configu‐
ration and are not applied when a configuration is transferred.

Prerequisites
• There is a USB connection to the extension module.
• Senders/receivers have at least the functional scope V 1.1.0/1.2.0.
• Receiver and sender (optional) are connected to the extension module.

Identifying the device

Make that the system can be clearly identified so that configuration changes or service
functions are always carried out on the correct system. You should therefore assign a
unique device name to the system.
Before configuration changes or service functions, use the Identify the device function in
the toolbar of the device window to identify the connected devices.
The FIELD LED of the connected senders and receivers and the STATE LED of the
extension module then flash red and green alternately.

Online configuration
To configure a system online, first connect the extension module to your computer via
USB and read the current configuration of the system with its devices and properties.
The extension module and all connected devices of the ESPE must remain connected
during the process.
Then change the configuration and transfer the changed configuration back to the
system.

Offline configuration
To configure one or more systems offline, create a “Project device” in Safety Designer
without linking it to a physical device.
You can then configure the project device in Safety Designer. To do so, you need to
manually create and define the properties of all devices that are part of the system,
and save the configuration on the computer. You can transfer the configuration to a
system at a later time.

Verified configurations
To use a configuration on a device for security functions, you need to perform a one-off
verification of the configuration after transferring it.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 131

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

When you save a project, information is saved for each device as to whether the
configuration is verified. When you open a project file, each device tile and the Overview
dialog of the device window show whether the configuration is verified.
You can transfer a verified configuration to the same or an identical device again.

Configuration memory in the system

The configuration is saved in the following devices:
• Extension module
• Receiver of the system
If the configuration includes a sender configuration, the sender configuration is also
saved in the senders of the system. The sender configuration is also part of the overall
configuration that is saved in the extension module and in the receiver.

Configuration information
► Check the changed configuration in Safety Designer (Report page) before transfer‐
ring the configuration.
► Then ensure the correct functioning of the device.

7.6.1.3 Reading configuration

Overview
You can read out the configuration of a system and save it in Safety Designer. You can
then edit the configuration or transfer it to other systems.

Procedure
1. Connect the extension module to the computer via USB.
2. Open the connected system in the device window.
3. Ensure that the desired system is connected, click on Identify the device in the
toolbar.
✓ The FIELD LED of the connected senders and receivers and the STATE LED of the
extension module flash red and green alternately.
4. In the main navigation pane, click on Configuration.
✓ The Configuration menu opens. The different pages within the configuration are
displayed in the Navigation area.
5. In the navigation area, click on Read out.
✓ The Read out page opens. On this page, you will find the device being configured
in Safety Designer on the left, and the connected physical device on the right. The
checksums of the two devices indicate whether the configurations differ.
6. Click on Read from device.
✓ The transfer process is displayed in Safety Designer. Safety Designer will notify you
as soon as the transfer process is complete.

7.6.1.4 Transferring a configuration

Overview
Once you have completed the configuration in Safety Designer, transfer the configura‐
tion to the connected system.
During configuration, you can compare the values that are configured for the system in
the project with the values that are saved in the system.
The compatibility of the configuration is checked during transfer. An existing configura‐
tion on the system is overwritten.

132 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Procedure
1. Connect the extension module to the computer via USB.
2. Open the connected system in the device window.
3. Ensure that the desired system is connected, click on Identify the device in the
toolbar.
✓ The STATE LED (extension module) and the field indicator (receiver, sender) of the
devices of the system flash red and green alternately.
4. In the main navigation pane, click on Configuration.
✓ The Configuration menu opens. The different pages within the configuration are
displayed in the Navigation area.
5. Check the configuration thoroughly.
6. In the navigation area, click on Transfer.
✓ The Transfer page opens. On this page, you will find the device being configured in
Safety Designer on the left, and the connected physical device on the right. The
checksums of the two devices indicate whether the configurations differ.
7. Click on Transfer to device.
✓ The transfer process is displayed in Safety Designer. Safety Designer will notify you
as soon as the transfer process is complete.
✓ If the configuration has not yet been verified, Safety Designer displays a verifica‐
tion report.

Further topics
• "Verifying configuration", page 133

7.6.1.5 Verifying configuration

Overview
By verifying the configuration, you can confirm that the configuration complies with the
planned safety function and fulfills the requirements in the risk assessment.
During verification, Safety Designer reads back the configuration transferred to the
device. It compares the configuration with the configuration saved in Safety Designer. If
both configurations are identical, Safety Designer displays the verification report. If the
user confirms that this is correct, the system is considered to be verified.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Errors can occur when transferring the configuration to the device, e.g., due to environ‐
mental influences or faulty cables. The verification report always contains the exact
settings stored in the device.
► Check the verification report carefully before confirming.

Prerequisites
• The configuration corresponds to the planned safety function and meets the
requirements of the risk assessment.
• The configuration has just been transferred to the system and Safety Designer
displays the verification report.

Procedure
1. Thoroughly review the verification report.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 133

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

► If the verification report does not match the planned safety function, click on
Cancel, correct the configuration, and transfer it again.
► If the verification report matches the planned safety function, click on OK.
✓ Device configuration is shown as verified.

Complementary information
After successful transfer and verification of a configuration, the safety function remains
stopped. You have the following options for reactivating the safety function:
• Start the safety function (via Safety Designer or the SICK Safety Assistant app)
• Perform a device restart (via Safety Designer or the SICK Safety Assistant app)
• Disconnect and reconnect the voltage supply

7.6.2 Overview
On the Overview alternately you will find information about your project, the extension
module and current system data, if it is connected.

Figure 66: “Overview” page for a deTec4 system with DMM4

1 Information about the system
2 Displays the individual devices of the connected system (the current firmware and additional information on the
individual devices and product identification can be accessed via the info icons)

7.6.3 Configuring the system

A system includes all devices of the ESPE with connected extension module.
To configure the system, you need to select the system in your project and open it in the
device window.

134 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

The system is configured on various pages in the device window. On the Hardware config‐
uration page, you can view and adjust the hardware and connections of all devices. On
the pages under Feature configuration, you can activate various functions and configure
the corresponding settings.

7.6.3.1 Possible combinations of functions in Safety Designer

You can activate various functions for the device in Safety Designer.
Certain functions cannot be combined as they either require the same connections
or cannot be combined conceptually. Safety Designer issues an error message if you
activate functions that cannot be combined.
If you activate functions that cannot be combined, corresponding error messages are
displayed in the Tasks area of Safety Designer.

Non-combinable functions
The following functions cannot be combined with each other when configuring via
Safety Designer.
Table 53: Functions and their limitations
Function Non-combinable functions
Cascade • Muting (general)
(incl. smart presence detection) • Smart Box Detection
Automatic calibration of the protective field • Reduced transmitting power
width
Reduced resolution (Basic) • Partial muting
Smart Box Detection • Cascade (incl. smart presence detection)
• Muting (general)
• Multiple sampling
• SDI
SDI • Smart Box Detection

7.6.3.2 Hardware configuration

Overview
On the Hardware configuration page, you can view and adjust the hardware configuration
of your system.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 135

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Figure 67: Hardware configuration page for a deTec system with DMM4
1 Hardware configuration: Overview of the free and assigned connections or inputs/outputs on the product
2 Catalog: Overview of the available elements and devices
3 Properties: Settings for the configurable elements and devices
4 Pin assignment: Settings for manual pin assignment

Hardware configuration
In the Hardware configuration area, you can see the current hardware configuration of
your system. All free and assigned connections or inputs/outputs of your system are
displayed there. You can move already connected devices or elements to other connec‐
tions using drag-and-drop. If a connection is already assigned, the new assignment
overwrites the old assignment. Move a device or element to the trash can icon to
remove it from the configuration.

Catalog
In the Catalog area, you can see the available devices and elements that you can
connect to your system. If you point to a device with the mouse pointer, the possible
positioning of the device in the system is highlighted. If you point to an element with the
mouse pointer, the possible connections for the element on the system are highlighted.
When you double-click on a device, it is automatically positioned at the standard posi‐
tion in the system. When you double-click on an element, it is automatically positioned
on the standard connection. Devices and elements can also be set at a position using
drag-and-drop.

136 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Properties
On the Properties tab, you can adjust the properties of the selected element, e.g., the
switching function or the assignment of application diagnostic outputs.
You can also configure settings for the individual devices (host device, guest devices,
extension module).

Pin assignment
On the tab Pin assignment tab, you can deactivate the automatic pin assignment and
manually configure the function of the pins (inputs and outputs) on the connections.

7.6.3.2.1 Elements
Table 54: Available elements for the hardware configuration
Element Function
Application diagnostic output (ADO) Displays various system statuses for diagnostic pur‐
poses.
Belt stop Input for belt stop signal when muting. Stops the timers
of time monitors and muting conditions if a conveyor belt
stop is detected at the belt stop input.
Command device pushbutton Input device, e.g., for reset or override (depending on the
configuration).
Command device pushbutton with key Input device that has Command device pushbutton and
switch key-operated pushbuttons, e.g., for reset and override
(depending on the configuration).
Muting release Additional muting signal
Switching from partial muting to muting Additional muting signal
External device monitoring (EDM) Monitors the status of downstream contactors that are
controlled by the OSSD of the product.
IO-Link Connection for an IO-Link master. Serves as an interface
for the transmission of non-safety diagnostic and status
data.
Operating mode switch Input device for selecting different operating modes,
or input for signals for switching to different operating
modes.
Muting Input for muting signals.
Safety device inputs (SDI) Input for connecting safety sensors.

7.6.3.3 Configuring beam coding

Overview
The beam coding “uncoded” allows for particularly short response times. To protect
against interference from systems in close proximity to each other, code 1 and code 2
must be used.

Important information

NOTE
The beam coding is set for the system and must be the same for the sender and
receiver.
► Ensure that the same beam coding is used for the sender.
► If the sender is connected to the extension module, check that the Also transfer
configuration for sender(s) checkbox is activated on the General page.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 137

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
2. In the Protective field configuration area, select the desired coding for Beam coding.

Further topics
• "Protection against interference from systems in close proximity to each other",
page 36
• "Using beam coding", page 37

7.6.3.4 Configuring the protective field width

Overview
By default, the protective field width is automatically measured when the device is
switched on and is not changed during operation.
Alternatively, you can define a range for the manual setting of the protective field width.
The protective field width can change within this range during operation.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
2. In the Protective field configuration area, select Manual for Protective field width.
3. Select the desired range for the protective field width.

Further topics
• "Manual adjustment of the protective field width", page 28

7.6.3.5 Configuring application diagnostic output

Overview
You can output predefined output signals via the application diagnostic outputs to
indicate various system statuses. You can configure up to 4 application diagnostic
outputs, provided the connections are not required for other functions.
When using the following elements on the Hardware configuration page, the application
diagnostic output is automatically assigned to the corresponding connection:
• Command device pushbutton
• Command device pushbutton with key switch

Prerequisites
• An application diagnostic output is connected.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the Application diagnostic output (ADO) element to the desired connection.
3. In the Properties area, select the desired output signal.
✓ The application diagnostic output is assigned the selected output signal. Repeat
the procedure to configure further application diagnostic outputs.

138 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Complementary information
On the General page, you will find an overview of all application diagnostic outputs and
the assigned signals. You can also change the signals on this page if they are not
automatically specified by an element assigned on the Hardware configuration page. In
this case, to make a change the automatic assignment must first be deactivated on the
Hardware configuration page.
Some output signals cannot be connected to the same connection as other functions
for safety reasons. In this case, the task list displays an error and you need to change
the assignment of the connections.
The following combinations are not possible:
• If you use the muting release or switching between partial muting and muting
functions:
° The Muting object in protective field output signal cannot be connected to the
same connection (applies to system connection, extension connection, X1 or
X2).
° The Weak signal output signal cannot be connected to the same connection
(applies to X1 or X2).
° The Ignored object output signal cannot be connected to the same connec‐
tion (applies to X1 or X2).
• If you use the safety sensors (SDI) on connection X1:
° The application diagnostic output at connection X1 cannot be used.
Further topics
• "Application diagnostic output", page 77
• "Output signals", page 78

7.6.3.6 Configuring (smart) restart interlock

Prerequisites
• A reset pushbutton is connected.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the Command device pushbutton or Command device pushbutton with key switch
element to the connection to which the reset pushbutton is connected.
3. In the Properties area, select the desired switching function.
° Reset: If you only use the reset pushbutton for the restart interlock.
° Reset/Override: If you also use the reset pushbutton for override.
✓ You have configured the restart interlock. The application diagnostic output associ‐
ated with connection has been assigned automatically. Continue with the following
steps to configure the smart restart interlock.
4. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
5. Activate the Smart restart interlock checkbox.
6. Set the object size for the smart restart interlock via the number of beams.

Further topics
• "Restart interlock", page 73

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 139

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

7.6.3.7 Configuring cascading

Overview
You can use cascading to connect up to 3 devices, e.g., to provide presence detection.
The connected devices act like a long safety light curtain. Only one device, the host, is
connected to the control cabinet. The second device, guest 1, is connected to the host.
The third device, guest 2, is connected to guest 1.

Important information

NOTE
The configuration for the cascade is set for the system and must be the same for the
sender and receiver.
► Ensure that the same cascade configuration is used for the sender.
► If the sender is connected to the extension module, check that the Also transfer
configuration for sender(s) checkbox is activated on the General page.

Prerequisites
• At least two devices are connected as a cascade.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the required number of Devices for the cascade into the configuration.
3. Click on each device individually and in the Properties area, check and if necessary
adjust the values for Protective field height and Resolution.

Complementary information
Apart from the protective field height and resolution settings configured here, all other
functions apply to the entire cascade.
The exception to this is functions where individual configuration of host devices and
guest devices is possible (e.g., reduced resolution).
During online configuration, the hardware configuration of the devices is automatically
read in and preset.

Further topics
• "Cascading", page 83
• "Configuring smart presence detection", page 140

7.6.3.8 Configuring smart presence detection

Prerequisites
• At least two devices are connected and configured as a cascade.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
2. Activate the Smart presence detection checkbox in the Cascade area.

Further topics
• "Smart presence detection", page 84
• "Configuring cascading", page 140

140 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

7.6.3.9 Configuring the transmitting power

Prerequisites
• The sender and receiver are connected to each other.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
2. Activate the Also transfer configuration for sender(s) checkbox in the Sender configuration
area.
3. In the Protective field configuration area, selected the desired value for Transmitting
power.
4. If the Reduced value has been selected: Make sure that the value Manual is
selected for Protective field width.

Further topics
• "Transmitting power adjustment", page 38
• "Configuring the protective field width", page 138

7.6.3.10 Configuring multiple sampling

Overview
The multiple sampling specifies how often an object must be detected before the
protective device responds with a protective field interruption. Double sampling is set by
default.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
2. In the Multiple sampling area, set the desired number of scans.

Further topics
• "Multiple sampling", page 67

7.6.3.11 Configuring reduced resolution (Basic)

Overview
In a cascade, you can configure different settings for host, guest 1 and guest 2.

Prerequisites
• For cascade: The devices are entered in the hardware configuration.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Reduced resolution (basic).
✓ The Reduced resolution page opens. On this page, you can see the individual device
or all devices in the cascade.
2. Activate the Interruption allowed up to checkbox for the host.
3. Enter the desired number of beams for the host.
✓ The resulting effective resolution is displayed.
4. Optional: Repeat the last two steps for guest 1 and guest 2.

Further topics
• "Reduced resolution", page 40

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 141

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

7.6.3.12 Configuring operating modes

Prerequisites
• An operating mode selector switch or a controller is connected or (only for a
non-safety-related use of the function) an IO-Link connector is connected.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the element used for the input signals (Operating mode switch or IO-Link) to the
intended connection.
3. For IO-Link only: In the Properties area. activate the Operating modes checkbox.
4. In the Navigation area, click on Operating modes.
✓ The Operating modes page opens.
5. Activate the Activate operating modes checkbox.
✓ A table for creating the operating modes appears. A standard operating mode
(required) is created with the current configuration.
6. If required: Activate the Input evaluation tolerance time checkbox and enter the
desired time.
7. If required: Activate the Monitoring of the maximum operating mode switchover time
checkbox and enter the desired time.
8. Add the desired operating modes to the table. Click on the plus symbol at the
right-hand end of the table and select the desired operating mode:
° Add standard operating mode
° Add alignment mode
° Add OSSD OFF mode
You need several standard operating modes if you want to use a function (e.g.,
muting) with different settings.

Complementary information
Further configuration of the standard operating modes is carried out in the areas for
the corresponding functions (e.g., muting). You can check the respective settings of the
created standard operating modes in the overview table on the Operating modes page.
No further settings are required for the alignment mode and OSSD OFF mode.

Further topics
• "Operating mode selection", page 67

7.6.3.13 Configuring muting

Overview
You can select one of the following muting variants:
• Cross muting
• Exit monitoring
• Entry/exit monitoring

Prerequisites
• The muting sensors required for the muting variant are connected.
• Optional: The supplementary signals used for muting are connected.
• Optional (for override): A pushbutton control switch or a pushbutton control switch
with key switch is connected.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.

142 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.

2. Drag two (four for entry/exit monitoring) Muting elements to the connections to
which the muting sensors are connected.
° For cross muting and exit monitoring, the muting signals must be present
at the In1 (A1) and In2 (A2) inputs on the extension connection or at the
In4 (A1) input on the system connection and In2 (A2) input on the extension
connection.
When using the DMM4 extension module, the muting signals may also be
present at the In5 (A1) and In6 (A2) inputs of the extension module.
° For entry/exit monitoring, the muting signals must be present at the In5 (A1),
In6 (A2), In7 (B1) and In8 (B2) inputs of the DMM4 extension module.
3. If required: Drag the Muting release element to the connection to which the supple‐
mentary signal is connected.
4. If required: Drag the Switching from partial muting to muting element to the connection
to which the supplementary signal is connected.
5. For override: Drag the Command device pushbutton or Command device pushbutton with
key switch element to the connection to which the pushbutton or the pushbutton
with key switch control device is connected.
6. For override: In the Properties area, select the desired switching function.
° Override: If you use the pushbutton or key switch exclusively for override.
° Reset/Override: If you also use the pushbutton for the restart interlock.
7. In the Navigation area, click on Muting.
✓ The Muting page opens.
8. Activate the Activate muting checkbox.
9. Select the desired muting variant.
10. In the Navigation area, click on Muting parameters.
✓ The Muting parameters page opens.
11. Set the desired muting parameters.
✓ You have configured muting. When the muting conditions are valid, all light beams
of the protective field are then bypassed. You can use partial muting to define
individual light beams that remain active even if the muting conditions are valid.
12. Continue with the following steps to configure partial muting.
13. In the Navigation area, click on Partial muting.
✓ The Partial muting page opens.
14. Activate the Activate partial muting checkbox.
15. Select beams that should remain active even if the muting conditions are valid.

Complementary information
You can define different operating modes with different muting settings. The Muting
parameters and Partial muting pages are available for each defined operating mode.
You can deactivate muting for individual operating modes. You cannot select different
muting variants, however.

Further topics
• "Muting", page 41
• "Data sheet", page 189

7.6.3.14 Activating IO-Link for control

Overview
Communication via IO-Link is activated by default and can be used to read out diagnos‐
tic and configuration data.
For a non-safety-related use, you can also activate the control of individual functions via
IO-Link.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 143

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Prerequisites
• An IO-Link connector is connected.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the IO-Link element to the connection to which the IO-Link connector is
connected.
3. In the Properties area, activate the checkboxes for the functions that are to be
controlled via IO-Link.

Further topics
• "IO-Link", page 85

7.6.3.15 Deactivating IO-Link

Overview
Communication via IO-Link is activated by default and can be used to read out diagnos‐
tic and configuration data.
You can deactivate communication via IO-Link.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on General.
✓ The General page opens.
2. Deactivate the Activate IO-Link for diagnostics checkbox.

7.6.3.16 Activating external device monitoring (EDM)

Prerequisites
• The auxiliary contacts of the contactors are connected to an EDM input.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the External device monitoring (EDM) element to the connection to which the
auxiliary contacts of the contactors are connected.

7.6.3.17 Activating inputs for safety sensors (SDI)

Prerequisites
• At least one safety sensor is connected.

Procedure
1. In the Navigation area, click on Hardware configuration.
✓ The Hardware configuration page opens.
2. Drag the Safety device inputs (SDI) element to the connection to which the safety
sensor is connected.
3. Optional: Repeat the step for other safety sensors.

Complementary information
• You can output the status of the safety sensors via an application diagnostic
output.

144 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Further topics
• "Inputs for safety sensors (SDI)", page 88

7.6.3.18 Identification
Overview
On the Identification page, you can optionally enter attributes for the system. The attrib‐
utes are used to identify the system (and the associated devices) or to differentiate
between different systems. The attributes appear in reports and in the diagnostic data.

Device name
If a number of systems are used in an application or in a project, a unique device name
helps to tell the individual devices apart.

Project name
The project name is used to identify an entire project. The same project name should
be chosen for all systems in the project.

Application name
The application name can be the same for a number of systems in the project.

User name
The optional user name helps later users to find a contact for the application.

Application image
An image helps to identify the application more quickly. The application image is saved
in the project file on the computer. Safety Designer supports the following file formats:
BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, TIF.

Description
A description makes it easier to understand an application’s context more quickly.

7.6.4 Starting and stopping safety function

Overview
In some situations, for example tests during commissioning, you can start or stop the
safety function manually.

Procedure
Start safety function
►
Click on the button.
Stop the safety function
►
Click on the button.

7.6.5 Report
Overview
A report shows the settings and data of a system. You have the option of saving and
archiving this data as a PDF.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 145

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Report
When you open the Report dialog box, the Safety Designer creates a report. If you click
on Update after making changes to the configuration, you will receive an updated report.

Composition of the report

You can assemble the contents of the report as required.

Complementary information
National and international standards promote or recommend specific data and the
person responsible for it. The required data are included in the report.

7.6.6 Service
Overview
The service functions are always performed for the entire system (all devices of the
ESPE with connected extension module).
You can run the following under service:
• Reboot device
• Reset the device to factory settings
• Manage user groups and passwords
• Activate/deactivate the laser alignment aid

7.6.6.1 Assigning or changing passwords

Prerequisites
• The system is connected to the computer.

Procedure
1. Open the connected system in the device window.
2. Click on Identify the device on the toolbar to check that the desired system is
connected.
✓ The FIELD LED of the connected devices and the STATE LED of the extension
module flash red and green alternately.
3. In the device window under the main navigation Service, select the User password
entry.
4. If you are assigning the password for a user group for the first time, the user group
may need to be activated first.
5. In the User password dialog box, select the user group.
6. Enter the new password twice and use Transmit to device to confirm.
7. When you are prompted to log on, select your user group and enter the corre‐
sponding password.
✓ The new password is valid for the user group immediately.
✓ The new password applies to the entire system (all devices of the ESPE with
connected extension module).

7.6.6.2 Resetting the password

Overview
If you have forgotten the password of the Administrator user group, you can reset it with
the assistance of SICK.

Prerequisites
• The system is connected to the computer.

146 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Procedure
1. Request the form for resetting your password from SICK support.
2. Open the connected system in the device window.
3. Ensure that the desired system is connected, click on Identify the device in the
toolbar.
✓ The FIELD LED of the connected devices and the STATE LED of the extension
module flash red and green alternately.
4. In the main navigation pane, click on Service.
5. In the Navigation area, click on User password.
6. In the User password dialog box, select the Start password reset process option.
7. Send the information displayed on the form to SICK support.
✓ You will then receive an activation code.
8. Enter and confirm the activation code in the field provided.
✓ The password for the Administrator user group is reset to the factory settings
(SICKSAFE) for the entire system (all devices of the ESPE with connected extension
module).
✓ The Maintenance and Authorized Client user groups are deactivated for the entire
system. The configuration is not changed.

Further topics
• "User groups", page 148

7.6.6.3 Reset to factory settings

Prerequisites
• The system is connected to the computer.

Procedure
1. Open the connected system in the device window.
2. Ensure that the desired system is connected, click on Identify the device in the
toolbar.
✓ The FIELD LED of the connected devices and the STATE LED of the extension
module flash red and green alternately.
3. In the main navigation pane, click on Service.
4. In the Navigation area, click on Factory settings.
✓ The Factory settings page opens.
5. In the Reset device completely area, click on Resetting the device completely.
✓ The system (all devices of the ESPE with connected extension module) is reset to
the factory settings.
✓ If devices are connected in a cascade, the cascading is configured automatically.
✓ If 24 V is present at the EDM input, the external device monitoring is activated
automatically.

7.7 Service functions of the mobile app

Overview
You can use various service functions with the SICK Safety Assistant app. If the service
function may only be executed by certain user groups, you will be asked to enter the
corresponding password.
• Starting and stopping the safety function
• Reboot device
• Reset the device to factory settings
• Manage user groups and passwords
• Activate/deactivate the laser alignment aid

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 147

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

Important information

NOTICE
If you change passwords using the Safety Assistant app with a de-energized system and
using the default password, unauthorized persons must be prevented from accessing
the contents of the NFC tag.
This is relevant until the system is commissioned. When the voltage supply is active,
the new passwords are adopted by the system and the contents of the NFC tag are
overwritten.

NOTICE
If you reset the system to factory settings using the SICK Safety Assistant app when
the system is de-energized, the voltage supply must then be restored to complete the
process.

Prerequisites
• NFC-enabled device, e.g., a smartphone
• Existing connection with the device in the SICK Safety Assistant app

Complementary information
The SICK Safety Assistant app is available for devices with the following operating
systems:
• Android
• iOS
Further topics
• "User groups", page 148

7.8 User groups

Overview
The devices contain a hierarchy of user groups that regulate access to the devices. The
devices in a system use the same password.
For certain actions (e.g., transferring a configuration), you are requested to log onto the
connected system with the respective user group.

User groups
Table 55: User groups
User group Password Authorization
Operator No password required. Anyone can • May read configuration from the
log on as a machine operator. device.
Maintenance Deactivated ex-works, i.e. it is not • May read configuration from the
personnel initially possible to log on as a device.
maintenance technician. The user • May transfer verified configura‐
group can be activated by the user tion to the device.
group administrator and provided • Changing own password
with a password. allowed.

148 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

User group Password Authorization

Authorized client Deactivated ex-works, i.e. it is • May read configuration from the
not initially possible to log on as device.
an authorized customer. The user • May transfer verified and
group can be activated by the user unverified configuration to the
group administrator and provided device.
with a password. • May verify configuration.
• Changing own password
allowed.
• Changing the password of the
Maintenance personnel user group
is allowed.
Administrator The password SICKSAFE is created • May read configuration from the
at the factory. device.
► Change this password to pro‐ • May transfer verified and
unverified configuration to the
tect the device against unau‐
device.
thorized access.
• May verify configuration.
• Resetting whole device to fac‐
tory settings allowed.
• Activating and deactivating the
Maintenance personnel and Author‐
ized client user groups is
allowed.
• Changing own password
allowed.
• Changing the passwords of
the Maintenance personnel and
Authorized client user groups is
allowed.

7.9 Automatic restoration of the configuration when a device is replaced

Overview
Receivers and extension modules save the software configuration of the entire system
(all devices of a single system or a cascade).
You can therefore replace individual devices in your system without having to configure
the replacement devices.
If you use a device that may already have been configured to replace a (defective)
device in the system, reset it to the factory settings first.
You can also replace several devices in the system at the same time. To restore the
entire system, however, at least the extension module or a receiver must be retained for
software configuration.
Table 56: Options for restoring the configuration when replacing the device
System Extension module At least one receiver At least one sender
remains remains remains
Single system The extension module The receiver transfers The sender only con‐
with software transfers the configura‐ the configuration to the tains the sender con‐
configuration tion to the newly con‐ newly connected devi‐ figuration and cannot
nected devices: ces: transfer any configura‐
tion to newly connected
• Receiver • Extension module 2)
devices.
• Sender 1) • Sender 1)

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 149

Subject to change without notice
7 CONFIGURATION

System Extension module At least one receiver At least one sender

remains remains remains
Single system No configuration saved No automatic restoration of the configuration pos‐
with configura‐ in the configuration sible.
tion via system memory of the exten‐
plug sion module.
Cascade with The extension module The receiver transfers The sender only con‐
software config‐ transfers the configura‐ the configuration to the tains the sender config‐
uration tion to the newly con‐ newly connected devi‐ uration and transmits
nected devices: ces: this to newly connected
senders.
• Receiver • Extension module 2)
• Sender 1) • Receiver
• Sender 1)
Cascade with No configuration saved The receiver transfers The sender only con‐
configuration via in the configuration the configuration to the tains the sender config‐
system plug memory of the exten‐ newly connected receiv‐ uration and transmits
sion module. ers. this to newly connected
senders.
1) Only applies if the sender and receiver are connected and the sender has also been configured via
software. Otherwise, automatic restoration of the sender configuration is not possible. In this case,
establish the connection between the sender and receiver or configure the sender via the system plug.
2) Only applies if the configuration memory of the extension module does not contain a configuration. If the
configuration memory of the extension module contains a configuration, this is transferred to the receiver
(and the other devices).

Important information

NOTICE
If you connect an extension module with a configuration to the ESPE, the system
applies the configuration from the configuration memory of the extension module.
► Ensure that the configuration memory of the new extension module contains no
configuration or the intended configuration.

NOTICE
After replacing the device, check whether the configuration has been transferred to the
replacement device as expected.

NOTICE
After replacing the sender, check whether the replacement device is using the correct
transmitting power.

Complementary information
If the software configuration saved in the receiver or extension module also contains
the sender configuration, the sender must also be connected to the receiver to auto‐
matically restore the configuration of a device.
When the configuration is restored automatically, the replacement device also adopts
the user group and password settings in addition to the configuration.
Once the configuration has been restored and transferred to a replacement device, the
following devices switch to configuration mode:
• Sender: If a sender has been replaced, all senders switch to configuration mode.
• Receiver: If a receiver or the extension module has been replaced, all receivers
switch to configuration mode.

150 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 CONFIGURATION 7

Further topics
• "Configuration mode", page 113

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 151

Subject to change without notice
8 COMMISSIONING

8 Commissioning
8.1 Overview
Important information

NOTICE
Before commissioning, check that the sender is using the correct transmitting power.

Prerequisites
• Project planning is completed.
• Mounting is completed.
• Electrical installation is completed.
• Configuration is completed.
• The correct transmitting power is set for the sender.
• Dangerous state of the machine is and remains off during commissioning.
• The outputs of the device do not affect the machine during commissioning.
• The machine has been inspected and released by qualified safety personnel.
• Protective device works properly.
• The protection function is checked after each change to the machine or to the
integration or the operating and boundary conditions of the device. If necessary, a
new commissioning is carried out.

Procedure
1. If required: Connect up to three devices to form a cascade.
2. Check the DIP switches at the sender and receiver and set them correctly if
required.
3. Fitting the system plug.
4. If required: Connect the receiver and sender using the DMM4 extension module.
5. Switch on the voltage supply.
° If a change to the configuration is detected or the device has been reset
to the factory settings, the device is in configuration mode and the field
indicator flashes green.
6. Configure the system:
For software configuration:
° Transfer the software configuration from Safety Designer.
For configuration on the system plug:
° If required: Configure restart interlock.
° If the configuration for the cascading of the restart interlock or external
device monitoring needs to be changed, reset the device to factory settings.
7. Once configuration is complete, start the safety function, restart the device, or
briefly interrupt the voltage supply and switch it back on.
8. After completing the configuration, align the sender and receiver.
9. Check the protective device.

Further topics
• "Project planning", page 26
• "Mounting", page 94
• "Electrical installation", page 104
• "Configuration", page 111
• "Aligning the sender and receiver", page 153
• "Check during commissioning and modifications", page 158

152 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 COMMISSIONING 8

8.2 Switching on
Overview
After switching on, the sender and receiver initialize. All LEDs on the sender and
receiver will light up briefly. They then indicate the following information:
• If a change to the configuration is detected or the device has been reset to the
factory settings, the device is in configuration mode and the field indicator flashes
green.
• The field indicator and diagnostic LEDs indicate the current configuration.
• The receiver indicates the alignment quality using diagnostic LEDs 1, 2, 3 and 4
after a few seconds.
Diagnostic LEDs 5 and 6 light up if the topmost beam (far from system plug) is
synchronized. Diagnostic LEDs 7 and 8 light up if the bottommost beam (near
system plug) is synchronized.
• In normal operation, the diagnostic LEDs indicate the current configuration. The
field indicator, the STATE LED of the sender and the OSSD LED of the receiver also
light up.

Further topics
• "Configuration mode", page 113
• "Indications when switching on", page 163

8.3 Aligning the sender and receiver

Overview
Once mounting and electrical installation are complete, the sender and receiver must
be aligned with each other.

Important information

DANGER
Dangerous state of the machine
► Make sure that the dangerous state of the machine is (and remains) switched off
during the alignment process.
► Ensure that the outputs of the ESPE have no effect on the machine during the
alignment process.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The integrated laser alignment aid switches the OSSDs to the OFF state.
► Ensure that the outputs of the ESPE have no effect on the machine when the
integrated laser alignment aid is activated.
► Only use the integrated laser alignment aid to align the ESPE.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 153

Subject to change without notice
8 COMMISSIONING

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The integrated laser alignment aid may influence the receiver of an ESPE in close
proximity. In such cases, the neighboring ESPE may not detect persons or parts of the
body that require protection.
► Perform an alignment or take other measures to ensure that the laser beam only
hits the front screen of the relevant receiver. The laser beam must not hit any
external receiver should the integrated laser alignment aid be switched on by
mistake or due to a fault. An external receiver is a receiver that is not part of the
same ESPE or same cascade.
► During alignment in particular, make sure that the laser beam does not hit any
external receiver.

NOTE
While aligning to the indication of the alignment quality, pay attention to the synchroni‐
zation indication of the topmost and bottommost beam and the bracket with which the
sender and receiver are attached.

Prerequisites
• Sender and receiver have been mounted at the correct height.
• The sender and receiver can be rotated in the brackets. If necessary, loosen the
fixing screws slightly.
• The protective field is free of objects. Neither objects nor body parts (e.g. hand,
tool, optional AR60 laser alignment aid) are in the protective field. Otherwise, at
most diagnostic LEDs 1 and 2 light up during alignment.

Procedure
1. Switch on the voltage supply of the ESPE.
2. Roughly align the sender with the receiver: Rotate the sender so that it points
toward the receiver.
► If required, you can activate the integrated laser alignment aid (e.g., via a
connected switch or pushbutton). Turn the sender so that the beam of the
integrated laser alignment aid hits the area of diagnostic LEDs 1, 2, 3 and 4
on the longitudinal axis of the receiver.
3. Align the receiver to the sender: Turn the receiver and pay attention to the indica‐
tion of the alignment quality and the synchronization status of the topmost and
bottommost beams.
► If a hand or a tool is in the protective field during the alignment, but diagnos‐
tic LEDs 5, 6, 7 and 8 are already lit up, remove the object and continue with
step 6.
4. Align the sender to the receiver with more precision as needed and pay attention
to the indication of the alignment quality and the synchronization status of the
topmost and bottommost beams.
5. Align the receiver to the sender with more precision as needed and pay attention
to the indication of the alignment quality and the synchronization status of the
topmost and bottommost beams.
6. If at least 3 (better: 4) of diagnostic LEDs 1, 2, 3 and 4 and diagnostic LEDs 5,
6, 7 and 8 light up blue, fix the components in place in the brackets. Torque:
2.5 Nm ... 3 Nm.
7. Switch the voltage supply off and back on again.
8. Check diagnostic LEDs 1 ... 4 for the alignment quality and the diagnostic LEDs
5 ... 8 for the synchronization of the topmost and bottommost beams in order to
ensure that the components are still aligned with each other correctly.

154 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 COMMISSIONING 8

NOTE
If suitable wiring has been established, activate the integrated laser alignment aid.

Complementary information
In many cases, the optional AR60 laser alignment aid and the alignment tool available
as an accessory can make alignment even easier. If deflector mirrors are installed, the
AR60 laser alignment aid can be used at the receiver. If there is a large protective field
height, it can be used at the top end of the sender and at the receiver.
Since the optional AR60 laser alignment aid is placed with the adapter inside the
protective field of the ESPE, at most diagnostic LEDs 1 and 2 light up blue and the
OSSD LED lights up red. To check whether the OSSD LED of the receiver lights up
green and diagnostic LEDs 5,6,7 and 8 light up blue, remove the optional AR60 laser
alignment aid.

Further topics
• "Alignment with the QuickFix bracket", page 155
• "Alignment with the FlexFix bracket or with the replacement bracket", page 156
• "Alignment quality display", page 157
• "Diagnostic LEDs", page 162
• "Accessories", page 207

8.3.1 Alignment with the QuickFix bracket

Prerequisites
• The sender and receiver have been mounted using a QuickFix bracket.

Alignment with the QuickFix bracket

The QuickFix bracket offers you the following adjustment options for aligning the sender
and receiver with each other:
• Displacement along the device axis

Figure 68: QuickFix bracket: adjustment

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 155

Subject to change without notice
8 COMMISSIONING

8.3.2 Alignment with the FlexFix bracket or with the replacement bracket
Prerequisites
• A FlexFix bracket or replacement bracket has been used to mount the sender and
receiver.

Alignment with the FlexFix bracket or the replacement bracket

The FlexFix bracket and replacement bracket offer you the following adjustment options
for aligning the sender and receiver with each other:
• Displacement along the device axis
• Rotation around the device axis (± 15°) 9).

± 15°

Figure 69: FlexFix bracket: adjustment/rotation

NOTE
Recommendation for aligning a long device so that it rotates uniformly in both brackets:
► Grab the alignment device roughly in the center between the two brackets.

9) If muting arms are attached to the sender or receiver, the devices can be rotated by ± 5° around their longitudinal axis

156 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 COMMISSIONING 8

8.3.3 Alignment quality display

Important information

NOTE
As soon as the diagnostic LEDs 1, 2 and 3 light up, the alignment is good and availabil‐
ity is stable.
Body parts or objects in the protective field (e.g., hand, tool, AR60 optional laser
alignment aid) may impair the indication of the alignment quality (at most diagnostic
LEDs 1 and 2 light up).
► Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the protective field
Or
► Watch out for diagnostic LEDs 5, 6, 7 and 8. If diagnostic LEDs 5, 6, 7 and 8 light
up, the alignment is good and availability is stable.

Alignment quality display

Position of the LEDs: see "Receiver displays", page 21.

If front screen contamination increases in ongoing operation, the laser alignment aid
switches on or the alignment takes longer than 3 seconds, the receiver shows the
alignment quality again.
Once the ESPE is aligned and the protective field is clear (field indicator: flashing yellow
or lit up green), the alignment quality display switches off after a certain period of time.

Table 57: Alignment quality display

LEDs Meaning
Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
o o o o o o o o Alignment is inadequate, or the protective field is
at least partially interrupted. The receiver cannot
synchronize with the sender.
O Blue o o o At least one beam is synchronized.
However, the alignment is inadequate, or the pro‐
tective field is at least partially interrupted.
O Blue O Blue o o The alignment or the signal strength is still not
sufficient for stable availability, or the protective
field is at least partially interrupted. 1)
O Blue O Blue O Blue o Alignment is good, stable availability. 1) 2)
O Blue O Blue O Blue O Blue Alignment is very good. 1)
O Blue O Blue The topmost light beam (far from system plug) is
synchronized.
O Blue O Blue The bottommost light beam (near system plug) is
synchronized.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

1) If external device monitoring is configured and there is an EDM warning, diagnostic LED 1 flashes, while the other diagnostic LEDs 2, 3 and
4 indicate the alignment quality. If there is an error on the reset pushbutton, diagnostic LED 4 flashes, while the other diagnostic LEDs 1, 2
and 3 indicate the alignment quality.
2) If the protective fields are very wide, there is a possibility that diagnostic LED 4 does not light up, even with optimal alignment.

Further topics
• "Indications when switching on", page 163

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 157

Subject to change without notice
8 COMMISSIONING

8.4 Check during commissioning and modifications

The thorough check is intended to ensure that the safety functions are fulfilling their
planned purpose and whether persons are being adequately protected.
► Carry out the checks specified in the test plan of the manufacturer of the machine
and the operating entity.

158 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 OPERATION 9

9 Operation
9.1 Overview
Complementary information
You can find additional information on IO-Link in the IODD and the SDD for SOPAS ET.
You can find additional information on NFC in the SICK Safety Assistant app.
Information on the status of the ESPE and on diagnostics and troubleshooting can be
displayed as follows:
• Diagnostic LEDs
Status and fault information, as well as diagnostics data, are displayed directly on
the sender and receiver by means of the diagnostic LEDs.
• IO-Link
Status and error information as well as diagnostics data can be read by means of
an IO-link interface.
• NFC
Status and fault information, as well as diagnostics data, can be read out to an
NFC-capable device by means of an integrated NFC interface.
• Safety Designer configuration software
Status and error information as well as diagnostic data can be read out via the
Safety Designer configuration software in conjunction with an extension module.

Further topics
• "Diagnostic LEDs", page 162

9.2 Regular thorough check

The thorough check is intended to ensure that the safety functions are fulfilling their
planned purpose and whether persons are being adequately protected.
► Carry out the checks specified in the test plan of the manufacturer of the machine
and the operating entity.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 159

Subject to change without notice
10 MAINTENANCE

10 Maintenance
10.1 Regular cleaning
Overview
Depending on the ambient conditions of the safety light curtain, the front screens must
be cleaned regularly and in the event of contamination. Static charges can cause dust
particles to be attracted to the front screen.
The weld spark guard and deflector mirrors must be cleaned regularly and in the event
of contamination.
With increasing contamination, the 2 illuminated diagnostic LEDs 1 and 2 indicate that
the receiver is receiving a weak signal from the sender. If the device is not cleaned
and contamination increases, the safety light curtain switches to the OFF state when
contamination is high.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► Regularly check the degree of contamination on all components based on the
application conditions.
► Observe the information concerning test rod testing.

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► Make sure that the optical properties of the front screens of the sender and
receiver are not changed, e.g., by:
° beading water, mist, frost, or ice formation. If applicable, remove films or
other types of contamination, disconnect the voltage supply of the receiver
and then switch it back on.
° Scratches or damage. Replace the device if the front screen is scratched or
damaged.
► Make sure that all reflective surfaces and objects maintain a minimum distance
from the protective field.
► Make sure that no dispersive media (e.g., dust, fog, or smoke) are within the
calculated minimum distance from the protective field.

NOTICE
► Do not use aggressive or abrasive cleaning agents.
► Recommendation: Use lens cleaner and lens cloths from SICK.

Prerequisites
• Dangerous state of the machine is and remains off during cleaning.
• The outputs of the device do not affect the machine during cleaning.

160 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 MAINTENANCE 10

Procedure
1. Use a clean and soft brush to remove dust from the front screen.
2. Then wipe the front screen with a clean, damp cloth.
3. Check the alignment of the sender and receiver after cleaning.
4. Check the effectiveness of the protective device.

Further topics
• "Test rod check", page 90
• "Minimum distance from reflective surfaces", page 33

10.2 Regular thorough check

The thorough check is intended to ensure that the safety functions are fulfilling their
planned purpose and whether persons are being adequately protected.
► Carry out the checks specified in the test plan of the manufacturer of the machine
and the operating entity.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 161

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

11 Troubleshooting
11.1 Overview
Complementary information
You can find additional information on IO-Link in the IODD and the SDD for SOPAS ET.
You can find additional information on NFC in the SICK Safety Assistant app.
Information on the status of the ESPE and on diagnostics and troubleshooting can be
displayed as follows:
• Diagnostic LEDs
Status and fault information, as well as diagnostics data, are displayed directly on
the sender and receiver by means of the diagnostic LEDs.
• IO-Link
Status and error information as well as diagnostics data can be read by means of
an IO-link interface.
• NFC
Status and fault information, as well as diagnostics data, can be read out to an
NFC-capable device by means of an integrated NFC interface.
• Safety Designer configuration software
Status and error information as well as diagnostic data can be read out via the
Safety Designer configuration software in conjunction with an extension module.

Further topics
• "Diagnostic LEDs", page 162

11.2 Security

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► Immediately shut the machine down if the behavior of the machine cannot be
clearly identified.
► Immediately put the machine out of operation if you cannot clearly identify or
allocate the error and if you cannot safely remedy the error.
► Secure the machine so that it cannot switch on unintentionally.

NOTE
Additional information on troubleshooting is available from your SICK subsidiary.

11.3 Diagnostic LEDs

162 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

11.3.1 Indications when switching on

Overview
Immediately after switching on, all LEDs on the sender and receiver briefly light up.
Following this, the information below regarding configuration is indicated briefly.

Sender
Position of the LEDs: see "Sender displays", page 20.
Table 58: Indications on the sender when switching on
LEDs Meaning
STATE Field
o (3 s) Uncoded beam coding is configured. 1)
Ö Yellow, flashes once Beam coding, code 1 is configured. 1)
Ö Yellow, flashes twice Beam coding, code 2 is configured. 1)
O Yellow (3 s) Software configuration is active.
O Red ÖÖ Yellow/green Resetting the configuration to factory settings is
activated via DIP switch, see "Factory settings",
page 112.
O Red Ö Green The device is in configuration mode, see "Config‐
uration mode", page 113.
OR
Reset to factory settings is complete.
OR
Safety function is stopped.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates. Empty cells mean that the LED lights up, flashes, or is off.
1) No software configuration active.

Receiver
Position of the LEDs: see "Receiver displays", page 21.
Table 59: Indications on the receiver when switching on
LEDs LED-end cap Meaning
OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) Beam coding, uncoded is
configured.1)

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 163

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ö Yellow, O White o (3 s) Ö Yellow, flashes Beam coding, code 1 is con‐
flashes once (3 s) once figured.1)
Ö Yellow, O White o (3 s) Ö Yellow, flashes Beam coding, code 2 is con‐
flashes (3 s) twice figured.1)
twice
Ö Yellow o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) o (3 s) O White Ö Yellow (3 s) Software configuration is
(3 s) (3 s) active.
O White o (3 s) External device monitoring
(3 s) (EDM) is configured. 1)
O White o (3 s) Cascade with 1 guest or 2
(3 s) guest devices is configured.
1)

O White o (3 s) Restart interlock is config‐

(3 s) ured. 1)
O White o (3 s) Muting or partial blanking is
(3 s) configured.
OR
Smart Box Detection is con‐
figured. 1)
O White o (3 s) Reduced resolution is config‐
(3 s) ured. 1)
O White o (3 s) Scanning range adjustment
(3 s) is configured. 1)
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ o o o o o o o o ÖÖ Yellow/ Resetting the configuration
low/green green to factory settings is acti‐
vated via DIP switch, see
"Factory settings", page 112.
1)

164 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö Green Ö Green The device is in configura‐
tion mode, see "Configura‐
tion mode", page 113.
When a function is con‐
figured, the corresponding
diagnostic LED flashes.1)
OR
Reset to factory settings is
complete.
OR
Safety function is stopped.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates. Empty cells mean that the LED lights up, flashes, or is off.
1) No software configuration active.

After the configuration is displayed, diagnostic LEDs 1, 2, 3 and 4 indicate the alignment quality. Additionally, the synchronization
status of the topmost and bottommost beams of the ESPE are displayed by means of diagnostic LEDs 5 and 6 as well as 7 and 8.
If the configuration was changed, the diagnostic LEDs flash white for 3 s upon activation.
Once the ESPE is aligned and the protective field is clear (field indicator: flashing yellow or lit up green), the alignment quality display
switches off after a certain period of time.

Table 60: Alignment quality display

LEDs Meaning
Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
o o o o o o o o Alignment is inadequate, or the protective field is at least partially
interrupted. The receiver cannot synchronize with the sender.
O Blue o o o At least one beam is synchronized.
However, the alignment is inadequate, or the protective field is at
least partially interrupted.
O Blue O Blue o o The alignment or the signal strength is still not sufficient for stable
availability, or the protective field is at least partially interrupted. 1)
O Blue O Blue O Blue o Alignment is good, stable availability. 1) 2)
O Blue O Blue O Blue O Blue Alignment is very good. 1)
O Blue O Blue The topmost light beam (far from system plug) is synchronized.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 165

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs Meaning
Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Blue O Blue The bottommost light beam (near system plug) is synchronized.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

1) If external device monitoring is configured and there is an EDM warning, diagnostic LED 1 flashes, while the other diagnostic LEDs 2, 3 and 4 indicate the alignment quality. If there is an error on the
reset pushbutton, diagnostic LED 4 flashes, while the other diagnostic LEDs 1, 2 and 3 indicate the alignment quality.
2) If the protective fields are very wide, there is a possibility that diagnostic LED 4 does not light up, even with optimal alignment.

166 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

11.3.2 Status indicator

Overview
During operation, the status of the ESPE is indicated with LEDs.
The information in the tables applies both for single devices and for every device in a cascade.

Sender
Position of the LEDs: see "Sender displays", page 20.
The LEDs of the sender indicate the same status as the LEDs of the receiver when the sender and receiver are connected and when
the sender is in normal operation.
The OSSD state is displayed on the STATE LED of the sender and the status of the protective field is displayed on the field LED of the
sender.
The status information is transferred from the receiver to the sender automatically. A configuration process is not required.
Table 61: LEDs on the sender during normal operation
LEDs Description
STATE Field
O Yellow o Normal operation (sender and receiver are not connected to each other)
O Red Ö Ö Red/green The device has been identified in Safety Designer.
O Red ÖÖ Yellow/green Resetting the configuration to factory settings is activated via DIP switch.
O Red Ö Green The device is in configuration mode following a change to the configuration.
OR
Reset to factory settings is complete.
OR
Safety function is stopped.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

Receiver
Position of the LEDs: see "Receiver displays", page 21.

Table 62: LEDs on the receiver during normal operation

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning
OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O White o EDM is configured. 1

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 167

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O White o Cascade with 1 or 2 guest devices is config‐
ured. 1
O White o Code 1 or code 2 beam coding is configured. 1
o o Uncoded beam coding is configured. 1
O White o Restart interlock is configured. 1
O White o Muting or partial blanking is configured. 1
OR
Smart Box Detection is configured. 1
O White o Reduced resolution is configured. 1
O White o Scanning range adjustment is configured. 1
o o o o o o o O White Software configuration is active.
ÖÖ o o o o o o o o Ö Ö Red/green The device has been identified in Safety
Red/green Designer.
O Green o o The smart presence detection is configured.
The guest device is in sleep mode.
O Green O Green O Green The protective field of the host device is clear.
The protective fields of guest devices in a cas‐
cade are clear.
A valid operating mode is selected.
SDI is active.
O Red ÖÖ o o o o o o o o Ö Ö Yellow/ Resetting the configuration to factory settings
Yellow/ green is activated via DIP switch.
green
O Red Ö Green Ö Green The device is in configuration mode following a
change to the configuration.
When a function is configured, the correspond‐
ing diagnostic LED flashes.1
OR
Reset to factory settings is complete.
OR
Safety function is stopped.

168 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red O Green O Green The own protective field is clear, but the
OSSDs are in the OFF state.
The OSSDs can be in the OFF state for the
following reasons, for example:

• Cascade: At least 1 protective field of a

device in the cascade is interrupted or
there is an error at another device.
• The laser alignment aid of the sender is
switched on.
• Operating mode selection: The OSSD OFF
mode is active.
• SDI: At least one configured input for safety
sensors is in the LOW state.
O Red O Red O Red Its own protective field is interrupted.
The indicator is independent of the status of
the other protective fields.
OR
The override pushbutton has just been actu‐
ated.
OR
The protective field is clear.
The reset button has just been actuated.
OR
An error has occurred in Smart Box Detection.
The device is not in the override required sta‐
tus.
OR
No valid operating mode is selected.
O Red ÖÖ Ö Ö Yellow/red Override required.
Yellow/red Additional information on the override reason
is available via the diagnostic LEDs 1 … 8.
O Red Ö Yellow Ö Yellow The protective field is clear.
Reset required.
Ö Yel‐ The reset pushbutton is defective or is being
low actuated continuously. Check the wiring of the
reset pushbutton.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 169

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö Yel‐ EDM warning: The EDM input has no signal.
low Check contactors and wiring. Switch the volt‐
age supply off and then on again.
O Green O Yellow O Yellow Muting is currently active. The protective field
is bypassed.
OR
Smart Box Detection is configured. A valid
object is located in the protective field.
OR
The device is in the override status.
O Green O Yellow O White O Yellow Partial muting is currently active.
O Red Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ o O Yellow o o o Muting
low low low The protective field is interrupted.
The muting hold time was exceeded during exit
monitoring. The muting sensors are no longer
engaged.
Make sure that the protective field is clear
again.
O Red Ö Yel‐ o o o O Yellow o o o Muting
low The protective field is interrupted.
The muting hold time was exceeded during exit
monitoring. One muting sensor is still engaged.
O Red o o Ö Yel‐ o O Yellow o o o Muting
low The protective field is interrupted.
The sensor gap monitoring has been
exceeded.
O Red Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ o o O Yellow o o o Muting
low low The protective field is interrupted.
At least one active light beam was interrupted
during the partial muting.
O Red o Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ o O Yellow o o o Muting
low low The protective field is interrupted.
At least one muting sensor is engaged. The
muting condition is not met.

170 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö Yel‐ o o Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o Muting
low low The protective field is interrupted.
The total muting time was exceeded.
O Red o o Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o Muting
low low The protective field is interrupted.
The concurrence monitoring was exceeded.
O Red o o o ÖYel‐ OYellow o o OYellow Muting
low Error when detecting the muting direction.
The protective field is interrupted.
O Red o o ÖYel‐ o OYellow o o OYellow Muting
low Error during sequence monitoring.
The protective field is interrupted.
O Red o o ÖYel‐ ÖYel‐ OYellow o o OYellow Muting
low low Signal monitoring error after belt stop.
The protective field is interrupted.
O Red o ÖYel‐ o o OYellow o o OYellow Muting
low Muting release signal invalid.
The protective field is interrupted.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ o Ö Yel‐ o Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low low The protective field interruption is not contigu‐
ous.
OR
The protective field interruption does not start
at the lowest light beam.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ o o o Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low The object does not have the required mini‐
mum height.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ o Ö Yel‐ o o O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low The object is higher than the allowed maxi‐
mum object height.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ o Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low low low The protective field was interrupted during
object entry above the object height detected
later.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 171

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Meaning

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ o Ö Yel‐ o O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low low The object height is above the object height
detected at the beginning.
OR
The protective field above the detected object
is interrupted.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ o Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low low low The total time for Smart Box Detection has
been exceeded.
The object is still in the protective field.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ Ö Yel‐ O Yellow o o o ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red low low low low The protective field is still interrupted after the
expected object exit.
O Red ÖÖ Yel‐ ÖÖ Yellow/red Smart Box Detection Override required.
low/red An object has been detected in the protective
field while the OSSDs are in the OFF state.
o o o ÖYel‐ o o o OYellow No operating mode or no standard operating
low mode with configuration selected after switch‐
ing on.
OR
Change of operating mode is not complete.
O Red o o ÖYel‐ o o o o OYellow OSSD OFF mode activated.
low
O Red o ÖYel‐ o o o o o OYellow At least one configured input for safety sen‐
low sors (SDI) is in the LOW state.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates. Empty cells mean that the LED lights up, flashes, or is off.
1 If no software configuration is active.

If front screen contamination increases in ongoing operation, the laser alignment aid switches on or the alignment takes longer than
3 seconds, the receiver shows the alignment quality again.

Further topics
• "Alignment quality display", page 157
• "Connection of sender and receiver", page 80

172 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

11.3.3 Fault indicators

Overview
In the event of an error, the type of error is indicated by the LED display on the sender or receiver.
The information in the tables applies both for single devices and for every device in a cascade.
When a device in a cascade shows an error, the displays of the other devices in the cascade must also be observed. The fault cause is
only shown on the device in which it occurs.
If an error is detected on the extension module, the receiver switches to error status.

Sender
Position of the LEDs: see "Sender displays", page 20.
Table 63: Fault indication on the sender
LEDs Possible cause Troubleshooting
STATE Field
O Yellow Ö Red Fault in the voltage supply. ► Check the voltage supply, see "Techni‐
cal data", page 188.
► Switch the voltage supply off and then
on again.
► If the error persists, replace the sender,
see "Ordering information", page 204.
Ö Yellow Ö Red The sender identified an internal fault. ► Switch the voltage supply off and then
on again or restart the device.
► If the error persists, replace the sender,
see "Ordering information", page 204.
O Red ÖÖ Yellow/green Resetting the configuration to factory set‐ For additional information: see "Factory
tings is activated via DIP switch. settings", page 112.
O Red Ö Green The device is in configuration mode. For additional information: see "Configura‐
OR tion mode", page 113.
Reset to factory settings is complete.
OR
Safety function is stopped.
Ö Green Ö Red A problem occurred when resetting the ► Restart configuration, see "Factory set‐
configuration to factory settings via DIP tings", page 112.
switch.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 173

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs Possible cause Troubleshooting

STATE Field
O Red Ö Yellow Incompatible device detected. 1. For a sender-receiver connection,
ensure that the sender and receiver
devices are compatible, see "Connec‐
tion of sender and receiver", page 80.
2. Ensure that the connected sender
devices as well as the connected
receiver devices in a cascade
are compatible, see "Cascading",
page 83.
3. Ensure that the connected extension
module is compatible, see "Extension
module", page 18.
O Red Ö Red Communication fault between the senders ► Check the cascade wiring.
in a cascade. ► Switch the voltage supply off and then
on again or restart the device.
Ö Red Ö Red Error in the configuration ► Check the configuration settings of the
devices.
► If the sender and receiver are con‐
nected to each other, also check the
configuration of the receiver.
► Switch the voltage supply off and then
on again or restart the device.
► When the software configuration is
active, the DIP switches on the individ‐
ual device or host must be set to Off.
o Ö Red The voltage is or was too high when operat‐ ► Check the voltage supply, see "Techni‐
ing the sender. cal data", page 188.
► Replace the sender, see "Ordering infor‐
mation", page 204.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates.

1)) If the sender and receiver are connected by a cable, the LEDs on the sender indicate the same status as the LEDs on the receiver during normal operation. The
STATE LED on the sender adopts the state of the OSSD LED on the receiver.

Receiver
Position of the LEDs: see "Receiver displays", page 21.

174 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

Table 64: Fault indication on the receiver

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting
OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö Ö o o o o o o o Ö Red An internal fault has occur‐ ► Switch the voltage supply off
Red Red red. and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error continues to
persist, replace the receiver,
see "Ordering information",
page 204.
O Red Ö o Ö o o o o o o Ö Red Fault in the voltage supply. ► Check the voltage supply and
Red Red the power supply unit, see
"Technical data", page 188.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again.
► If the error continues to
persist, replace the receiver,
see "Ordering information",
page 204.
O Red Ö o Ö o Ö o o o o Ö Red Permanent error in the ► Replace the device,
Red Red Red voltage supply. see "Ordering information",
page 204.
O Red Ö o Ö Ö Ö o o o o Ö Red General error in the config‐ ► Check configuration settings
Red Red Red Red uration. including the permitted combi‐
nation of functions or reconfig‐
ure the device.
► Make sure that the correct sys‐
tem plug is used.
► Reset the device to factory set‐
tings.
O Red Ö o o Ö Ö o o o o Ö Red Parity faulty. ► Check setting of the parity DIP
Red Red Red switch.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 175

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö o o Ö o o o o o Ö Red The receiver has recog‐ ► Check the distance to senders
Red Red nized beams from several of the same design.
senders. ► Check the beam coding of the
receiver and systems in close
proximity.
► Ensure that beams from
another sender cannot hit the
receiver. (Exception: One of
the two systems uses code 1
and the other uses code 2),
see "Protection against inter‐
ference from systems in close
proximity to each other",
page 36.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
O Red Ö o o o Ö o o o o Ö Red A wiring fault has been ► Check the system wiring for
Red Red identified at the OSSDs. a fault. Make sure that the
E.g., at an OSSD: overvolt‐ OSSDs have been wired cor‐
age, short-circuit, cross- rectly, see "Integration into
circuit, permissible load the electrical control system",
capacity exceeded. page 71.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error continues to per‐
sist, replace the defective
components, see "Ordering
information", page 204.
O Red Ö o Ö Ö o o o o o Ö Red A wiring fault has been ► Check the system wiring for a
Red Red Red detected. fault. Ensure that the inputs
E.g., at an input: invalid are wired correctly.
signal, unexpected signal. ► Make sure that the IO-link
interface was wired correctly.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.

176 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö Ö o Ö o o o o o Ö Red Incompatible device ► For a sender-receiver connec‐
Red Red Red detected. tion, ensure that the sender
and receiver devices are com‐
patible, see "Connection of
sender and receiver", page 80.
► Ensure that the connected
sender devices as well as the
connected receiver devices in
a cascade are compatible, see
"Cascading", page 83.
► Ensure compatibility with
the connected extension mod‐
ule. see "Extension module",
page 18.
O Red Ö Yel‐ EDM warning (only if the Normally, this message is dis‐
low external device monitoring played only briefly after switching
function is active): on and goes out as soon as
The OSSDs have con‐ the voltage supply for the auxili‐
stantly been in the OFF ary contacts is established at the
state since the safety light contactors. If the message is dis‐
curtain was switched on played for longer:
and no signal is present at
► Check the contactors.
the EDM input.
► Check the wiring of the contac‐
tors.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
O Red Ö O Red o o o Ö o o o Ö Red EDM fault (only if the exter‐ ► Check the contactors.
Red Red nal device monitoring func‐ ► Check the wiring of the contac‐
tion is active): tors.
The state of the EDM input ► Switch the voltage supply off
has not changed within and then on again or restart
300 ms following a change the device.
to the OSSD state.
OR
The state of the EDM input
has changed even though
the OSSD state has not.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 177

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red ÖÖ o o o o o o o o Ö ÖYellow/green Resetting the configuration For additional information: see
Yellow/ to factory settings is acti‐ "Factory settings", page 112.
green vated via DIP switch.
O Red Ö Ö Green The device is in configu‐ For additional information: see
Green ration mode following a "Configuration mode", page 113.
change to the configura‐
tion.
OR
Reset to factory settings is
complete.
OR
Safety function is stopped.
O Red Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö o o o o Ö Red A problem occurred when ► Restart configuration, see
Red Red Red Red Red resetting the configuration "Factory settings", page 112.
to factory settings via DIP
switch.
O Red Ö o O Red o o o o o Ö Ö Red Incompatible configuration ► Check the configuration of the
Red Red of the devices in a host– devices. If the sender and
guest cascade. receiver are connected to each
other, also check the configu‐
ration of the sender. Check the
configuration of the extension
module.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error persists, reconfig‐
ure the device or, if necessary,
reset it to the factory settings,
see "Configuration", page 111.

178 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö o O Red o o o o Ö o Ö Red Incompatible configuration ► Check the configuration of the
Red Red of the devices in a host– devices. If the sender and
guest–guest cascade. receiver are connected to each
other, also check the configu‐
ration of the sender. Check the
configuration of the extension
module.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error persists, reconfig‐
ure the device or, if necessary,
reset it to the factory settings,
see "Configuration", page 111.
O Red Ö o O Red o o o o Ö Ö Ö Red Communication fault ► Check the cascade wiring.
Red Red Red between the receivers in a ► Switch the voltage supply off
host–guest cascade. and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error continues to per‐
sist, replace the defective
components, see "Ordering
information", page 204.
O Red Ö o O Red o o o Ö o o Ö Red Communication fault ► Check the cascade wiring.
Red Red between the receivers in ► Switch the voltage supply off
a host–guest–guest cas‐ and then on again or restart
cade. the device.
► If the error continues to per‐
sist, replace the defective
components, see "Ordering
information", page 204.
O Red Ö o O Red o o o Ö o Ö Ö Red Error in communication ► Check wiring.
Red Red Red between the receiver and ► Switch the voltage supply off
extension module. and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error persists, replace
the defective components.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 179

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö Ö o o o O Red o o o Ö Red The number of permitted ► Switch the voltage supply off
Red Red override statuses for mut‐ and then on again or restart
ing or Smart Box Detection the device.
has been exceeded.
Ö Yel‐ Reset pushbutton fault. ► Check that the reset pushbut‐
low ton is working. The reset push‐
button may be defective or is
being pressed continuously.
► Check the wiring of the reset
pushbutton.
O Red Ö o o O Red o o o o Ö Ö Red Different beam coding on ► Configure sender and receiver
Red Red the sender and receiver with the same beam coding.
detected. ► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
O Red Ö o o ÖRed Ö o o o O Red Ö Red Error at the input for safety ► Check the wiring of the SDI
Red Red sensors (SDI). inputs for errors.
► Check the function of the con‐
nected safety sensors.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error persists, replace
the defective components.
O Red Ö o o Ö o o o o O Red Ö Red Error in the operating ► Check the wiring of the inputs
Red Red mode. for the operating mode switch‐
Invalid combination of over for errors.
input signals for the oper‐ ► Check the function of the con‐
ating mode change. nected operating mode selec‐
tor switch or controller.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error persists, replace
the defective components.

180 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

LEDs LED-end cap Possible cause Troubleshooting

OSSD Field Diagnostic LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O Red Ö o O Red o o o Ö Ö o Ö Red Error of the connected ► Check the error of the con‐
Red Red Red extension module. nected extension module.
► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
O Red Ö Ö o Ö Ö o o o o Ö Red Configuration not com‐ ► Check the configuration of the
Red Red Red Red patible with device/sys‐ devices.
tem (for senders/receivers ► Check the system setup and
with functional scope V devices of the system.
1.1.0/1.2.0 or higher). ► Switch the voltage supply off
and then on again or restart
the device.
► If the error persists, reconfig‐
ure the device or, if necessary,
reset it to the factory settings.
O Red Ö Ö o o Ö o o o o Ö Red Configured function is not ► Make the function available
Red Red Red available in the function through another function pack‐
package used (for send‐ age.
ers/receivers with func‐ ► Adjust the configuration and
tional scope V 1.1.0/1.2.0 deactivate unavailable func‐
or higher). tions.
O Red Ö o o o Ö o o o O Red Ö Red When the software config‐ ► Set all DIP switches to the OFF
Red Red uration is active, not all position.
DIP switches are in the
OFF position.

o LED off. Ö LED flashes. O LED illuminates. Empty cells mean that the LED lights up, flashes, or is off.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 181

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

11.4 Diagnostics using Safety Designer

Overview
The following diagnostics tools are available in the device window:
• Message history
• Data recorder
• Event history
• Status of the beams
The diagnostic data are transferred via the USB connection.

Prerequisites
• An extension module is connected.
• The system is connected to the computer.

11.4.1 Message history

On the Message history page, you can see all errors, warnings and information about the
devices of the ESPE and the connected extension module.
You have the option of saving or printing the message history as a PDF. You can also
mark all entries (from all displayed devices) as seen or delete them.

Figure 70: Message history

1 Message history
2 Display filter
3 Details about the selected message

182 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

By right-clicking on the table header, you can select the columns displayed in the
message history.
Safety Designer shows details about the events in the bottom part of the window, ways
to solve them are also shown.
Table 65: Message history
Start automatic update

Stop automatic update

Mark all entries as viewed

Delete all entries

Deleted entries are hidden for the current user group and for user groups
with lower permissions. They are still visible to user groups with higher
permissions.
Print message history

Save message history as a PDF

Save message history as CSV

11.4.2 Data recorder

Overview
You can use the data recorder to record the signals of the system and play saved
recordings. The beam data of a single system or the host device in a cascade is
updated every 50 ms at most.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 183

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 71: Live view

The data can be recorded and then saved in a data recorder diagnostic file.
You can play the data recorder diagnostic file in the data recorder.
Table 66: Data recorder

Start recording

Stop recording

Selecting the displayed data and setting the display sequence

Full screen mode

Prerequisites
• The system is connected to Safety Designer.

Typical applications
• Test the signals for a muting application
• Check input information on the current operating mode
• Check why a signal change occurred on the safety output

184 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TROUBLESHOOTING 11

11.4.3 Event history

Overview
The event history displays information about the most recently stored events. Each
change of the OSSDs to the OFF state is saved as an event.

Data source
• Read from device: Only available when a system is connected. The data stored in the
system will be read.
• Load file: You can open a file that stores events that were previously read from a
system.
• Store data: You can save the events read from a system to a file for later analysis.

Event table
The event table shows all events for which an OSSD has switched to the OFF state.
If you select an entry in the event table, further details of that event are displayed in the
lower area.
The beam data of the host device for the last 5 scans before shutdown are available for
each event. You can use these to analyze an unexpected shutdown. For example, you
can determine the size of an object in the protective field that led to the shutdown.
The last signal changes before shutdown are available for the last 5 events. This allows
you to check, for example, the status change of input signals before the shutdown.

11.4.4 Status of the beams

Overview
The Status of the beams page shows the current status of the light beams of the con‐
nected system. Interruptions of the light beams as well as error and warning messages
are displayed. The status of the beams of guest devices in a cascade are displayed on
the relevant subpage.

Prerequisites
• The system is connected to Safety Designer.

11.5 Diagnostics using the mobile app

Overview
You can use various functions with the SICK Safety Assistant app. You can read out
diagnostic and configuration data, among other things, or use service functions.

Diagnostic data
The following diagnostic data can be displayed in an NFC-capable device:
• Overview (system setup and OSSD status of the overall system)
• Configuration
• Status of the beams (e.g., alignment quality, also for guest devices)
• Technical data (e.g., serial number and type code)
• Error history (error analysis with details of the error code, error description and
troubleshooting)
• Shutdown analysis (list of the last shutdown reasons including beam data and the
last signal changes before shutdown)
The device-specific information of the protective device can also be accessed when the
device is switched off.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 185

Subject to change without notice
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

The error analysis can be sent directly to SICK by e-mail via the SICK Safety Assistant
app.
To access the information for diagnostics and configuration, you need an NFC-enabled
device, e.g., a smartphone and the SICK Safety Assistant app.
► Hold the NFC-enabled device near the marked NFC-area on the lower end of the
receiver to access the diagnostic data.

Complementary information
The SICK Safety Assistant app is available for devices with the following operating
systems:
• Android
• iOS
Further topics
• "Service functions of the mobile app", page 147

11.6 Diagnostics via SOPAS ET

When configuring via the SP1/SP2 system plug, you can access the configuration
data via IO-Link. You can use the SDD for SOPAS ET to display the diagnostic and
configuration data transmitted via IO-Link.

186 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 DECOMMISSIONING 12

12 Decommissioning
12.1 Disposal
Procedure
► Always dispose of unusable devices in accordance with national waste disposal
regulations.

Complementary information
SICK will be glad to help you dispose of these devices on request.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 187

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

13 Technical data
13.1 Version numbers and functional scope
The following table describes technical changes or extensions to the functional scope
on the sender and receiver made in the course of product maintenance.
We use a three-digit version number to identify the changes in functional scope. The
change statuses are downward compatible with devices already in use.
The functional scope of the device is found at the following locations:
• On the type label: Field under the “Type” field
• In the SICK Safety Assistant app via NFC. In the diagnostic report:
° Technical data (general system data)
° Configuration (device information / functional scope)
• Via IO-Link in the ISDU of the respective device (DeviceIdent*): Field "HcsvMajor",
"HcsvMinor", "HcsvRelease"
• Via IO-Link in the SDD for SOPAS ET
• On the "Overview" page in Safety Designer
Table 67: Version numbers and functional scope of the receiver
Version number Amendments and new functions Additional information
No version number (V Initial device version
1.0.0)
V 1.1.0 Supplement to the Smart Box Detec‐ "Smart Box Detection",
tionfunction page 59
V 1.2.0 1) • DMM4 extension module availa‐
ble
• Configuration of existing func‐
tions is possible via software
• Addition of the following functions
via software configuration:
° Reduced resolution (simple)
° Manual adjustment of the pro‐
tective field width
° Transmitting
ment
power adjust‐

° Configurable muting (incl. 4-

signal muting and additional
muting signals)
° Smart restart interlock
° Operating mode selection
° Multiple sampling
° Safety sensor inputs (SDI)
Advanced ADO functions
°
1) Available for devices with a physical resolution of 30 mm.

Table 68: Version numbers and functional scope of the sender

Version number Amendments and new functions Additional information
No version number (V Initial device version
1.0.0)

188 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

Version number Amendments and new functions Additional information

V 1.1.0 1)
• DMM4 extension module availa‐
ble
• Configuration of existing func‐
tions is possible via software
• Addition of the transmitting power
adjustment function via software
configuration
1) Available for devices with a physical resolution of 30 mm.

13.2 Data sheet

Table 69: General system data
Minimum Typical Maximum
Protective field height, depending on 300 mm to 2,100 mm, 150 mm increments
type
Resolution (detection capability), 14 mm or 30 mm
depending on type
Protective field width 1) 2) 3)
Resolution 14 mm 0.15 m … 16 m 0.15 m … 20 m
Resolution 30 mm 0 m … 24 m 0 m … 30 m
Protection class 4)
III (IEC 61140)
Enclosure rating 5)
IP65 (IEC 60529)
IP67 (IEC 60529)
Supply voltage UV at the device 6) 7) 8) 19.2 V 24 V 28.8 V
Permissible current consumption of 2A
the entire system (system connection
via system plug of a single device or
the host device)
Permissible current consumption of 4A
the entire system (system connection
via DMM4 extension module)
Residual ripple 9) ± 10%
Response time "Response time", page 194
Synchronization Optical
Typ (IEC 61496) Type 4
Category (ISO 13849) Category 4
Performance level (ISO 13849) 10)
PL e
Safety integrity level (IEC 61508) 10) SIL 3
Safety integrity level (IEC 62061) 10) SIL 3
PFHD (average frequency of a dangerous failure per hour) 11) 12)
Single system 1.53 x 10-8
Cascade with one guest 3.05 x 10-8
Cascade with two guest devices 4.56 x 10-8
TM (mission time) 20 years (ISO 13849-1)
Safe status when an error occurs At least one OSSD is in the OFF state.
Number of beams in the system "Number of beams in the system", page 193
Test rod speed at which the test rod 0 m/s … 1.6 m/s
is reliably detected 13)

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 189

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

Minimum Typical Maximum

Muting parameters 14)

Successive overrides 1 5 360

Sensor gap monitoring (muting signal 0.01 s 0.5 s 2s
and ESPE)
Muting end delay 0.01 s 0.2 s 1s
Total time for Muting end by ESPE 15)
0.01 s 0.7 s 3s
Muting hold time 0.5 s 4s 4s
Concurrence monitoring 0.1 s 24 h 24 h
Total muting time 10 s 24 h 24 h
Smart Box Detection
Object speed 0.1 m/s 1 m/s
Object height hbox 134 mm (protective field
height - 54 mm)
Object width wbox min. 10 mm ... 100 mm 16)
Upper and lower object edge toler‐ At least 10 mm
ance dYbox (object height)
Lateral object edge tolerance dXbox min. 6 mm ... 60 mm (uncoded system)
(object width) 17) min. 4 mm ... 40 mm (coded system)
Minimum distance from objects min. 10 mm ... 100 mm 16)
Total Smart Box Detection time 24 h
Safety inputs (SDI)
Duration of the LOW state at an input 6 ms
for safety sensors (SDI), which leads
to the safe change of the OSSDs to
the OFF state
Operating modes
Tolerance time for operating mode 20 ms 1,000 ms 2,000 ms
selection
1) If the protective fields are very wide, there is a possibility that all four diagnostic LEDs 1, 2, 3 and 4 will
not light up even when alignment is optimal.
2) The minimum scanning range specifies a range in which a function is guaranteed to operate correctly
and safely under industrial conditions. A sufficient level of signal reserve to ensure very high availability is
included in the calculation.
3) The typical scanning range indicates a range in which the ESPE functions perfectly and reliably under
industrial conditions. The level of signal reserve is enough to ensure high availability.
4) The system must be supplied with SELV/PELV in accordance with IEC 60204-1.
5) The specified enclosure rating only applies if the system plug is fitted and the protective cover for the DIP
switches, which is attached to the SP2 system plug, is securely closed.
6) The external voltage supply must be capable of buffering brief power failures of 20 ms as specified in
IEC 60204-1. Suitable power supply units are available as accessories from SICK.
7) A fuse rated maximum 4 A shall be installed in the 24 V DC power supply circuit to the device in order to
limit the available current.
8) All inputs of the protective device must be supplied by the same voltage supply. If the sender and receiver
are connected to each other, they must be supplied by the same voltage supply.
9) Within the limits of UV.
10) For more detailed information on the exact configuration of your machine, please contact your relevant
SICK subsidiary.
11) The values apply for an installation height of up to 2,000 m above sea level. Additional information can
be found at your SICK subsidiary.
12) The specified values take into account the specified devices (sender and receiver) as well as the system
plugs. Additional accessories are not included in the values.
Additional accessories and extension modules may have to be considered separately.
13) Direction of movement and axis of the test rod perpendicular to the protective field.

190 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

14) The specified minimum and maximum values represent the respective configuration range when config‐
uring via software. The specified typical values refer to the preset fixed parameters for configuration via
the system plugs.
15) The values apply for the time from when the ESPE becomes clear until the termination of muting and
contain a sensor gap monitoring ESPE and a muting end delay.
16) The values depend on the object speed.
17) The values depend on the object speed and the set beam coding.

Table 70: Mechanical data

deTec4
Housing material Aluminum extruded profile
Housing color Anodized aluminum, similar to RAL 9005 (black) and
RAL 1021 (colza yellow)
Front screen material Polycarbonate, scratch-resistant coating
Weight Depending on the protective field height, see "Table of
weights", page 202

Table 71: Technical data for sender

Minimum Typical Maximum
Wavelength of sender 850 nm (Near-
infrared (NIR),
invisible)
Laser alignment aid
Wavelength 650 nm (red)
Average output power 390 µW
Laser class 1
Laser alignment aid switch input (In1)
Input voltage HIGH (active) 13 V 24 V 30 V
Input current HIGH 2 mA 5 mA 7 mA
Input voltage LOW (deactivated) –3 V 0V 3V
Input current LOW –0.1 mA 0 mA 0.5 mA
Laser alignment aid pushbutton input (In2)
Input voltage HIGH (active) 13 V 24 V 30 V
Input current HIGH 2 mA 5 mA 7 mA
Input voltage LOW (deactivated) –3 V 0V 3V
Input current LOW –0.1 mA 0 mA 0.5 mA
Control switch actuation time 65 ms

Table 72: Technical data for receiver

Minimum Typical Maximum
Output signal switching devices 2 PNP semiconductors, short-circuit protected 1), cross-
(OSSDs) circuit monitored
Duration of OFF state 100 ms
Switch-on delay 3 × response
time
ON state, switching voltage HIGH UV – 2.25 V 24 V UV
(Ueff) 2)
OFF state, switching voltage LOW 2) 3) 0V 0V 2.0 V
Current-carrying capacity of the 500 mA each
OSSDs
Leakage current of the OSSDs 2 mA each

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 191

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

Minimum Typical Maximum

Load capacity 2.2 µF
Load inductance 2.2 H
Test pulse data 4)
Test pulse width 130 µs 150 µs 300 µs
Test pulse rate 3 s -1 5 s -1 10 s -1
Discrepancy time (time offset 1 ms
between switching of OSSD2 and
OSSD1)
Inputs
Input voltage HIGH (active) 2) 11 V 24 V 30 V
Input current HIGH 6 mA 10 mA 15 mA
Input voltage LOW (deactivated) 2)
–3 V 0V 5V
Input current LOW –2.5 mA 0 mA 2 mA
Input capacitance 15 nF
External device monitoring input (EDM)
Connected contactors
Permissible dropout time 300 ms
Permissible pull in time 300 ms
Reset, override, Smart Box Detection Override inputs
Control switch actuation time 50 ms 60 s
Inputs for muting signals, supplementary signals for muting, belt stop
Input filter 50 ms
Muting signals
Output type of the muting sensors PNP switching
Current consumption of a muting 50 mA
sensor
Supply voltage Uv – 1 V Uv
Application diagnostic outputs (ADO) PNP semiconductor, short-circuit protected 1)
Output voltage HIGH (active) UV – 3 V UV
Output voltage LOW (deactivated) High resistance
Current carrying capacity 100 mA each
Permissible cable resistance
Cable between OSSD and load 5) 2.5 Ω
1) Applies to the voltage range between -30 V and +30 V.
12)) Compatible with type 1 and 3 digital inputs in accordance with IEC 61131-2.
2) Corresponding to digital inputs of types 1 and 3 according to IEC 61131-2.
3) The specified values are the switching voltage supplied by the safety light curtain. If higher voltages are
implanted externally, the maximum value of 2.0 V can be exceeded.
4) When active, the outputs are tested cyclically (brief LOW). When selecting the downstream controllers,
make sure that the test pulses do not result in deactivation when using the above parameters.
5) Limit the cable resistance of the individual wires to the specified value to ensure that the light curtain
functions correctly, particularly that a cross-circuit between the outputs is safely detected. (Also observe
IEC 60204-1.)
The specified value applies to the total resistance of each wire including contact and connector resistan‐
ces.

192 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

Table 73: Operating data

Minimum Typical Maximum
System connection Male connector, M12, 5-pin
Male connector, M12, 8-pin
Length of cable 200 mm
Cable diameter 5 mm
Cable material of the system or PUR
extension connection
Extension connection Optional, female connector, M12, 5-pin
Lengths of cable for connecting "Length of cable", page 200
cables and in cascades
Lengths of cable for other cables on 10 m
the extension connection
Ambient operating temperature 1) 2) 3) –30 °C +55 °C
Air humidity (non-condensing) 15% 95%
Storage temperature –30 °C +70 °C
Housing cross-section 31 mm × 34 mm, plus bracket, see "Dimensional draw‐
ings", page 203
Vibration resistance 4) 5 … 150 Hz, 3,5 mm / 1 g (EN 60068-2-6)
Shock resistance 5)
15 g / 6 ms (EN 60068-2-27)
Class 3M4 (IEC TR 60721-4-3)
EMC According to IEC 61496-1, IEC 61000-6-2,
IEC 61000-6-4
1) The temperature difference between sender and receiver must not exceed 25 K.
2) The cable belonging to the device incl. the associated connector plug must not be flexibly mounted under
–25° C.
3) Maximum ambient operating temperature over 1,000 m above sea level: +50 °C.
Maximum ambient operating temperature over 2,000 m above sea level: +45 °C.
4) Test conditions per axis: 1 octave/minute, 20 sweeps.
5) Test conditions per axis: 200 shocks.

13.3 Number of beams in the system

Overview
Only a limited number of beams can be used in one system. The maximum number
depends on various parameters.
Calculating the number of beams for a device:
• Resolution 14 mm: protective field height/mm / 10 (example, protective field
height 2100 mm: 2100/10 = 210 beams)
• Resolution 30 mm: protective field height/mm / 25 (example, protective field
height 2100 mm: 2100/25 = 84 beams)

Maximum number of beams in the system

Table 74: Maximum number of beams for a standalone device
Beam coding Resolution Multiple sampling Maximum number of
beams
Uncoded 14 mm, 30 mm 2, 3, 4 No limitation
Code 1 or code 2 14 mm 2, 3 No limitation
4 180
30 mm 2, 3, 4 No limitation

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 193

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

Table 75: Maximum number of beams in a cascade with one guest

Beam coding Resolution Multiple sampling Maximum number of
beams
Uncoded 14 mm, 30 mm 2, 3, 4 No limitation
Code 1 or code 2 14 mm (all devices) 2 375 1)
3 240
4 165
30 mm (at least one 2 No limitation
device)
3 240
4 166
1) For receivers with functional scope V 1.2.0 or higher: 390.

Table 76: Maximum number of beams in a cascade with two guest devices
Beam coding Resolution Multiple sampling Maximum number of
beams
Uncoded 14 mm, 30 mm 2, 3 No limitation
4 540
Code 1 or code 2 14 mm (all devices) 2 375 1)
3 240
4 165
30 mm (at least one 2 375
device)
3 232
4 159
1) For receivers with functional scope V 1.2.0 or higher: 390.

13.4 Response time

Overview
In addition to the safety light curtain, the ESPE also offers inputs for safety sensors
(SDI). Both protective devices have independent response times that need to be consid‐
ered individually.

NOTE
The response time of the safety light curtain depends on whether the safety light
curtain is used as a single system or in a cascade. The response time of the system
must be determined differently depending on this.

Response time of the safety light curtain (single system)

The response time depends on various device properties and configuration settings.

NOTE
If the Smart Box Detection function is configured on the receiver with 14 mm resolu‐
tion, a response time of 80 ms applies regardless of the protective field height and
beam coding.

194 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

Table 77: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 300 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 11 15 20
Code 1 or code 2 16 23 30
30 mm Uncoded 9 14 18
Code 1 or code 2 12 18 23

Table 78: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 450 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 12 17 22
Code 1 or code 2 19 28 36
30 mm Uncoded 10 14 19
Code 1 or code 2 14 20 26

Table 79: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 600 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 13 18 24
Code 1 or code 2 22 32 42
30 mm Uncoded 10 15 20
Code 1 or code 2 15 21 28

Table 80: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 750 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 13 20 26
Code 1 or code 2 25 36 48
30 mm Uncoded 11 15 20
Code 1 or code 2 16 23 30

Table 81: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 900 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 14 21 28
Code 1 or code 2 28 41 54
30 mm Uncoded 11 16 21
Code 1 or code 2 17 25 33

Table 82: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,050 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 15 23 30
Code 1 or code 2 31 45 60
30 mm Uncoded 11 17 22
Code 1 or code 2 18 27 35

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 195

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

Table 83: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,200 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 16 24 32
Code 1 or code 2 34 50 66
30 mm Uncoded 12 17 23
Code 1 or code 2 20 28 37

Table 84: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,350 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 17 25 34
Code 1 or code 2 37 54 72
30 mm Uncoded 12 18 23
Code 1 or code 2 21 30 40

Table 85: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,500 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 18 27 36
Code 1 or code 2 40 58 77
30 mm Uncoded 13 18 24
Code 1 or code 2 22 32 42

Table 86: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,650 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 19 28 37
Code 1 or code 2 42 63 83
30 mm Uncoded 13 19 25
Code 1 or code 2 23 34 45

Table 87: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,800 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 20 30 39
Code 1 or code 2 45 67 89
30 mm Uncoded 13 19 26
Code 1 or code 2 24 36 47

Table 88: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,950 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 21 31 41
Code 1 or code 2 48 72 Combination not
possible
30 mm Uncoded 14 20 26
Code 1 or code 2 25 37 49

196 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

Table 89: Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 2,100 mm
Resolution Beam coding Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐ Multiple sam‐
pling (2x) pling (3x) pling (4x)
14 mm Uncoded 22 33 43
Code 1 or code 2 51 76 Combination not
possible
30 mm Uncoded 14 21 27
Code 1 or code 2 27 39 52

Response time of the safety light curtain (cascade of two devices)

To calculate the response time of the safety light curtain, you need to add the response
times of the individual devices (see table 77 to see table 89) and also take the
configured multiple sampling into account.
► Calculate the response time of the cascade using the following formula:
tC = tH + tG1 - tM
Where:
° tC = Response time of the cascade
° tH = Response time of the device used as host
° tG1 = Response time of the device used as guest 1
° tM = Deduction depending on the configured multiple sampling
• Multiple sampling 2 (factory setting): 0 ms
• Multiple sampling 3: 3 ms
• Multiple sampling 4: 6 ms
✓ The calculated response time tC can be used for each protective field interruption
in the cascade.
✓ If only the response time for a protective field interruption at the host is to be
taken into account, the calculated response time tC can be reduced by 6 ms.

Response time of the safety light curtain (cascade of three devices)

To calculate the response time of the safety light curtain, you need to add the response
times of the individual devices (see table 77 to see table 89) and also take the
configured multiple sampling into account.
► Calculate the response time of the cascade using the following formula:
tC = tH + tG1 + tG2 - tM
Where:
° tC = Response time of the cascade
° tH = Response time of the device used as host
° tG1 = Response time of the device used as guest 1
° tG2 = Response time of the device used as guest 2
° tM = Deduction depending on the configured multiple sampling
• Multiple sampling 2 (factory setting): 0 ms
• Multiple sampling 3: 6 ms
• Multiple sampling 4: 12 ms
✓ The calculated response time tC can be used for each protective field interruption
in the cascade.
✓ If only the response time for a protective field interruption at the host is to be
taken into account, the calculated response time tC can be reduced by 12 ms.
✓ If only the response time for a protective field interruption at guest 1 is to be taken
into account, the calculated response time tC can be reduced by 6 ms.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 197

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

Response time for SDI

A general response time of 50 ms applies to the additional inputs for safety sensors
(SDI) of the DMM4 extension module.
The response time of the connected safety sensor must also be taken into account.
If contacts are connected to the input instead of safety sensors, the bounce time of the
contacts must also be taken into account.

13.5 Tolerance times

Unless otherwise specified, the tolerance times shown refer to the associated config‐
ured values (or fixed parameters). The tolerance range between the minimum and
maximum values indicates the respective switching range. The behavior is defined
accordingly for switchover times outside the tolerance range.
Table 90: Muting tolerance times
Minimum Typical Maximum
Muting end delay
Muting end delay (muting end One sensor deactivated: +
through muting signals, connection configured sensor gap mon‐
to the ESPE) itoring (muting signal) +
64 ms
Two sensors deactivated: +
configured sensor gap mon‐
itoring (muting signal) +
60 ms
Muting end delay (muting end One sensor deactivated: +
through muting signals, connection configured sensor gap moni‐
to the extension module) toring (muting signal) + 104
ms
Two sensors deactivated: +
configured sensor gap moni‐
toring (muting signal) + 100
ms
Muting end delay (Muting end by + configured sensor gap
ESPE) monitoring (ESPE) + muting
end delay + 110 ms
Muting hold time
Tolerance for muting hold time (con‐ + 45 ms + 60 ms
nection to the ESPE)
Tolerance for muting hold time (con‐ + 50 ms + 105 ms
nection to extension module)
Sensor gap monitoring
Tolerance for sensor gap monitoring – 7 ms + 10 ms
(muting sensor, connection to the
ESPE)
Tolerance for sensor gap monitoring – 42 ms + 45 ms
(muting sensor, connection to exten‐
sion module)
Tolerance for sensor gap monitoring (ESPE)
Multiple sampling 2 scans + 15 ms + 80 ms
Multiple sampling 3 scans – 10 ms + 55 ms
Multiple sampling 4 scans – 35 ms + 30 ms

198 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

Table 91: Tolerance time for operating mode selection

Minimum Typical Maximum
Tolerance for monitoring the maximum switchover time depending on the connection used for
operating mode selection
Extension module + 5 ms + 55 ms
IO-Link on the host or single device + 2 ms + 8 ms
IO-Link on the guest + 5 ms + 55 ms

13.6 Power consumption

Table 92: Power consumption of sender and receiver (resolution 14 mm)
Protective field Typical power Maximum power Typical power Maximum power
height in mm consumption for consumption of consumption of consumption of
sender in W sender in W receiver in W 1)2) receiver in W 1)2)
300 1.5 1.8 3.5 4.4
450 1.6 1.9 3.7 4.6
600 1.6 2.0 3.8 4.8
750 1.7 2.1 4.0 5.0
900 1.8 2.2 4.2 5.2
1050 1.9 2.3 4.3 5.4
1200 2.0 2.4 4.5 5.6
1350 2.1 2.5 4.7 5.8
1500 2.2 2.6 4.9 6.1
1650 2.2 2.7 5.0 6.3
1800 2.3 2.8 5.2 6.5
1950 2.4 2.9 5.4 6.7
2100 2.5 3.0 5.5 6.9
1) Power discharged again via the OSSDs depending on the connected OSSD load must be added to the
table values. The power consumption of connected loads and accessories must also be added to the
table values.
2) The power consumption increases by 0.5 W with the use of a receiver with integrated LED.

Table 93: Power consumption of sender and receiver (resolution 30 mm)

Protective field Typical power Maximum power Typical power Maximum power
height in mm consumption for consumption of consumption for consumption of
sender in W sender in W receiver in W 1)2) receiver in W 1)2)
300 1.3 1.5 3.3 4.1
450 1.4 1.6 3.4 4.2
600 1.4 1.7 3.4 4.3
750 1.5 1.8 3.5 4.4
900 1.6 1.9 3.6 4.4
1050 1.7 2.0 3.6 4.5
1200 1.7 2.1 3.7 4.6
1350 1.8 2.1 3.8 4.7
1500 1.9 2.2 3.8 4.8
1650 1.9 2.3 3.9 4.9
1800 2.0 2.4 4.0 5.0
1950 2.1 2.5 4.0 5.0

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 199

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

Protective field Typical power Maximum power Typical power Maximum power
height in mm consumption for consumption of consumption for consumption of
sender in W sender in W receiver in W 1)2) receiver in W 1)2)
2100 2.2 2.6 4.1 5.1
1) Power discharged again via the OSSDs depending on the connected OSSD load must be added to the
table values. The power consumption of connected loads and accessories must also be added to the
table values.
2) The power consumption increases by 0.5 W with the use of a receiver with integrated LED.

13.7 Length of cable

Overview
For typical applications, you can select the cable lengths according to the values given
in the tables. If your application is not covered by the typical applications, you must
calculate the maximum cable lengths taking the listed conditions into account.

Typical applications
The following tables show the permissible cable lengths for typical applications in which
the current consumption of the overall system is a maximum of 2 A.
Table 94: Maximum lengths of cable for conductor cross section 0.34 mm2, copper wire
Single system Cascade with 1 guest Cascade with 2 guest
devices
Separate con‐ s r
necting cables d3 d4
for sender and
receiver s r s r
d1 d2 d1 d2

s r s r s r
b c b c b c
S S S

b ≤ 80 m c ≤ 30 m b ≤ 80 m c ≤ 30 m b ≤ 80 m c ≤ 20 m
b + c ≤ 100 m d1, d2 ≤ 7 m d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 5 m
b + c ≤ 100 m
Connection of s r
sender and d3 d4
receiver via T-
connector on s r s r
d1 d2 d1 d2
the sender
sT c r sT c r sT c r
a a a
S S S

a ≤ 10 m c ≤ 25 m a ≤ 12 m c ≤ 16 m a ≤ 10 m c ≤ 10 m
d1, d2 ≤ 5 m d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 3 m
connection of s r
sender and d3 d4
receiver via T-
connector on s r s r
d1 d2 d1 d2
the receiver
s b
T r s b
T r s b
T r
a a a
S S S

a ≤ 20 m b ≤ 80 m a ≤ 20 m b ≤ 30 m a ≤ 14 m b ≤ 30 m
d1, d2 ≤ 5 m d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 3 m

200 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

S Control cabinet with safety relay or safety controller

T T-connector

Table 95: Maximum lengths of cable for conductor cross section 0.25 mm2, copper cable
Single system Cascade with 1 guest Cascade with 2 guest
devices
Separate con‐ s r
necting cables d3 d4
for sender and
receiver s r s r
d1 d2 d1 d2

s r s r s r
b c b c b c
S S S

b ≤ 80 m c ≤ 25 m b ≤ 50 m c ≤ 22 m b ≤ 50 m c ≤ 14 m
b + c ≤ 100 m d1, d2 ≤ 7 m d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 5 m
Connection of s r
sender and d3 d4
receiver via T-
connector on s r s r
d1 d2 d1 d2
the sender
sT c r sT c r sT c r
a a a
S S S

a ≤ 10 m c ≤ 15 m a ≤ 10 m c ≤ 10 m a≤6m c≤9m
d1, d2 ≤ 5 m d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 3 m
connection of s r
sender and d3 d4
receiver via T-
connector on s r s r
d1 d2 d1 d2
the receiver
s b
T r s b
T r s b
T r
a a a
S S S

a ≤ 15 m b ≤ 80 m a ≤ 14 m b ≤ 30 m a ≤ 10 m b ≤ 22 m
d1, d2 ≤ 5 m d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 3 m

S Control cabinet with safety relay or safety controller

T T-connector

Table 96: Maximum cable lengths for applications with the DMM4 extension module, copper
cable
Single system Cascade with 2 guest devices
s r
d3 d4

s r
d1 d2

s b
DMM
c r s b
DMM
c r
a a
S S

b ≤ 30 m c ≤ 10 m b ≤ 13 m c ≤ 10 m
a + c ≤ 14 m a + c ≤ 12 m
d1, d2, d3, d4 ≤ 3 m

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 201

Subject to change without notice
13 TECHNICAL DATA

S Control cabinet with safety relay or safety controller

Other applications
For other applications (e.g., higher current consumption), the following conditions must
be taken into account when calculating the cable lengths:
• Maximum cable lengths for individual connections:
° Connection from receiver to extension module: 10 m
° Connection from sender to extension module: 100 m
° Connection from sender to receiver: 100 m
° Connection of receivers in a cascade (host to guest 1 or guest 1 to guest 2):
10 m
° Connection of senders in a cascade (host to guest 1 or guest 1 to guest 2):
10 m
• The maximum lengths of cable specified in the typical applications for the con‐
necting cables from the receiver to the control cabinet, including the cable to the
sender when using a separate T-splitter, must not be exceeded.
• Maximum permissible cable resistance between OSSD and load: 2.5 Ω
• Minimum supply voltage on all devices in the system: 19.2 V
• Maximum permissible potential difference between the 0 V connections on the
receiver (host) and the 0 V on the OSSD load: 2 V

13.8 Table of weights

Table 97: Weight of sender and receiver
Protective field height in mm Weight in g 1)
s Sender r Receiver
300 230 240
450 370 380
600 510 520
750 640 650
900 780 790
1050 910 920
1200 1050 1060
1350 1180 1190
1500 1320 1330
1650 1450 1460
1800 1590 1600
1950 1730 1740
2100 1860 1870
1) Tolerance: ± 50 g.

202 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 TECHNICAL DATA 13

13.9 Dimensional drawings

30,7
41
30,7

40,8

20,8
12,8
56,8
29,5

L2
L1

L1
30
14
110,1

5
56,8

56,8
56,8

13,8
4

21,8

41 34 34

Figure 72: Dimensional drawing of sender and receiver

Table 98: Dimensions based on the protective field height, sender and receiver
Protective field height, nomi‐ Protective field height, effec‐ Dimension L2 in mm
nal in mm tive = dimension L1 in mm
300 313 332
450 463 482
600 613 632
750 763 782
900 913 932
1050 1063 1082
1200 1213 1232
1350 1362 1382
1500 1512 1531
1650 1662 1681
1800 1812 1831
1950 1962 1981
2100 2112 2131

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 203

Subject to change without notice
14 ORDERING INFORMATION

14 Ordering information
14.1 Scope of delivery
Scope of delivery, sender
• Sender

Scope of delivery, receiver

• Receiver
• Test rod with diameter corresponding to the resolution of the safety light curtain
• Safety note
• Mounting instructions
• Operating instructions for download: www.sick.com

14.2 Ordering information

Table 99: Ordering information deTec4 14 mm resolution

Protective field s Sender r Receiver
height in mm
Part number Type code Part number Type code
300 1220084 C4P-SA03011A00 1220097 C4P-EA03011C00
450 1220085 C4P-SA04511A00 1220098 C4P-EA04511C00
600 1220086 C4P-SA06011A00 1220099 C4P-EA06011C00
750 1220087 C4P-SA07511A00 1220100 C4P-EA07511C00
900 1220088 C4P-SA09011A00 1220101 C4P-EA09011C00
1050 1220089 C4P-SA10511A00 1220102 C4P-EA10511C00
1200 1220090 C4P-SA12011A00 1220103 C4P-EA12011C00
1350 1220091 C4P-SA13511A00 1220104 C4P-EA13511C00
1500 1220092 C4P-SA15011A00 1220105 C4P-EA15011C00
1650 1220093 C4P-SA16511A00 1220106 C4P-EA16511C00
1800 1220094 C4P-SA18011A00 1220121 C4P-EA18011C00
1950 1220095 C4P-SA19511A00 1220107 C4P-EA19511C00
2100 1220096 C4P-SA21011A00 1220108 C4P-EA21011C00

Table 100: Ordering information deTec4 30 mm resolution

Protective field s Sender r Receiver
height in mm
Part number Type code Part number Type code
300 1220123 C4P-SA03031A00 1220137 C4P-EA03031C00
450 1220124 C4P-SA04531A00 1220138 C4P-EA04531C00
600 1220125 C4P-SA06031A00 1220139 C4P-EA06031C00
750 1220126 C4P-SA07531A00 1220140 C4P-EA07531C00
900 1220127 C4P-SA09031A00 1220141 C4P-EA09031C00
1050 1220128 C4P-SA10531A00 1220142 C4P-EA10531C00
1200 1220129 C4P-SA12031A00 1220143 C4P-EA12031C00
1350 1220130 C4P-SA13531A00 1220144 C4P-EA13531C00
1500 1220131 C4P-SA15031A00 1220145 C4P-EA15031C00
1650 1220132 C4P-SA16531A00 1220146 C4P-EA16531C00
1800 1220134 C4P-SA18031A00 1220147 C4P-EA18031C00
1950 1220135 C4P-SA19531A00 1220148 C4P-EA19531C00
2100 1220136 C4P-SA21031A00 1220149 C4P-EA21031C00

204 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ORDERING INFORMATION 14

Sender with small scanning range

Table 101: Ordering information deTec4 14 mm resolution
Protective field height in mm s Sender
Part number Type code
300 1220639 C4P-SA03011C00
450 1220640 C4P-SA04511C00
600 1220641 C4P-SA06011C00
750 1220642 C4P-SA07511C00
900 1220643 C4P-SA09011C00
1050 1220644 C4P-SA10511C00
1200 1220645 C4P-SA12011C00
1350 1220646 C4P-SA13511C00
1500 1220647 C4P-SA15011C00
1650 1220648 C4P-SA16511C00
1800 1220649 C4P-SA18011C00
1950 1220650 C4P-SA19511C00
2100 1220651 C4P-SA21011C00

receiver with integrated LED

Table 102: Ordering information deTec4 14 mm resolution
Protective field height in mm r Receiver
Part number Type code
300 1220109 C4P-EA03011D00
450 1220110 C4P-EA04511D00
600 1220111 C4P-EA06011D00
750 1220112 C4P-EA07511D00
900 1220113 C4P-EA09011D00
1050 1220114 C4P-EA10511D00
1200 1220115 C4P-EA12011D00
1350 1220116 C4P-EA13511D00
1500 1220117 C4P-EA15011D00
1650 1220118 C4P-EA16511D00
1800 1220122 C4P-EA18011D00
1950 1220119 C4P-EA19511D00
2100 1220120 C4P-EA21011D00

Table 103: Ordering information deTec4 30 mm resolution

Protective field height in mm r Receiver
Part number Type code
300 1220150 C4P-EA03031D00
450 1220151 C4P-EA04531D00
600 1220152 C4P-EA06031D00
750 1220153 C4P-EA07531D00
900 1220154 C4P-EA09031D00
1050 1220155 C4P-EA10531D00
1200 1220156 C4P-EA12031D00
1350 1220157 C4P-EA13531D00
1500 1220158 C4P-EA15031D00
1650 1220159 C4P-EA16531D00

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 205

Subject to change without notice
14 ORDERING INFORMATION

Protective field height in mm r Receiver

Part number Type code
1800 1220160 C4P-EA18031D00
1950 1220161 C4P-EA19531D00
2100 1220162 C4P-EA21031D00

System plug
Table 104: SP1 system plug ordering information
Connection type Type code Part number
System connection (M12, 5-pin) 1000 2076832
System connection (M12, 8-pin) 1200 2076834
System connection (M12, 5-pin) and extension 1100 2076833
connection (M12, 5-pin)
System connection (M12, 8-pin) and extension 1300 2076835
connection (M12, 5-pin)

Table 105: SP2 system plug ordering information

Connection type Type codes Part number
System connection (M12, 5-pin) 2000 2093097
System connection (M12, 8-pin) 2200 2093099
System connection (M12, 5-pin) and extension 2100 2093098
connection (M12, 5-pin)
System connection (M12, 8-pin) and extension 2300 2093100
connection (M12, 5-pin)

206 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ACCESSORIES 15

15 Accessories
15.1 Brackets
Table 106: Brackets ordering information
Part Type code Part number
QuickFix bracket (2x) BEF-3SHABPKU2 2066048
QuickFix bracket (4x) BEF-3SHABPKU4 2098710
FlexFix bracket (2x) BEF-1SHABPKU2 2098709
FlexFix bracket (4x) BEF-1SHABPKU4 2066614
FlexFix mounting kit (2x FlexFix brackets and BEF-1SHAHBKU2 2141969
assembly materials for installation in device
columns PP4 and PC4)
Replacement bracket (kit with 4 brackets, BEF-1SHABS004 2100345
mounting kit for replacement of swivel mount
brackets 2019649 and 2019659 or side
bracket 2019506 with the FlexFix bracket
when using the wells provided)
Replacement bracket (kit with 4 brackets, BEF-1SHABU004 2099282
mounting kit for replacement of swivel mount
brackets 2030510 or side bracket 2019506
with the FlexFix bracket when using the wells
provided)

15.2 Mounting accessories

Table 107: Mounting accessories ordering information
Part Part number
Alignment tool 4084133

15.3 Extension modules

Table 108: Ordering information for extension modules
Part Type code Part number
DMM4 DMM4-AA110A0A0 1125562

15.4 Weld spark guard

Overview
The weld spark guard can be used to protect the front screen of the safety light curtain.
The weld spark guard reduces the scanning range of the system by 15%.

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
The weld spark guard may influence the optical properties of the safety light curtain,
leading to persons or body parts that should be protected being reflected and therefore
remaining undetected.
► Make sure that all reflective surfaces and objects maintain the correct minimum
distance from the protective field.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 207

Subject to change without notice
15 ACCESSORIES

Differing minimum distance to reflective surfaces for devices with a resolution of

30 mm with weld spark guard
If a device with a resolution of 30 mm is used with the weld spark guard, the calculated
minimum distance to reflective surfaces ("Minimum distance from reflective surfaces",
page 33) must be doubled.

Ordering information

Table 109: Weld spark guard ordering information

Part Part number
Weld spark guard 2069268

Mounting

1 4

Figure 73: Mount the weld spark guard

1 Clean the front screen
2 Remove backing film
3 Press against the weld spark guard
4 Cut off excess ends

Further topics
• "Minimum distance from reflective surfaces", page 33

15.5 Connection technology

Table 110: Ordering information for M12 connecting cable, 5-pin (0.34 mm2) 10)
Part Type code Part number
Female connector, straight, 2 m cable, flying YF2A15-020UB5XLEAX 2095617
leads
Female connector, straight, 5 m cable, flying YF2A15-050UB5XLEAX 2095618
leads
Female connector, straight, 10 m cable, flying YF2A15-100UB5XLEAX 2095619
leads
Female connector, straight, 15 m cable, flying YF2A15-150UB5XLEAX 2095620
leads

10) Ambient operating temperature: Down to −30° C with fixed installation.

208 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ACCESSORIES 15

Part Type code Part number

Female connector, straight, 20 m cable, flying YF2A15-200UB5XLEAX 2095614
leads
Female connector, straight, 30 m cable, flying YF2A15-300UB5XLEAX 2095621
leads
Female connector, angled, 2 m cable, flying YG2A15-020UB5XLEAX 2095772
leads
Female connector, angled, 5 m cable, flying YG2A15-050UB5XLEAX 2095773
leads
Female connector, angled, 10 m cable, flying YG2A15-100UB5XLEAX 2095774
leads

Table 111: Ordering information for connection cable, M12, 8-pin (0.25 mm2) 11)
Part Type code Part number
Female connector, straight, 2 m cable, flying YF2A18-020UA5XLEAX 2095652
leads
Female connector, straight, 2.5 m cable, flying YF2A18-025UA5XLEAX 2099229
leads
Female connector, straight, 5 m cable, flying YF2A18-050UA5XLEAX 2095653
leads
Female connector, straight, 7.5 m cable, flying YF2A18-075UA5XLEAX 2099230
leads
Female connector, straight, 10 m cable, flying YF2A18-100UA5XLEAX 2095654
leads
Female connector, straight, 15 m cable, flying YF2A18-150UA5XLEAX 2095679
leads
Female connector, straight, 20 m cable, flying YF2A18-200UA5XLEAX 2095680
leads
Female connector, straight, 30 m cable, flying YF2A18-300UA5XLEAX 2095681
leads
Female connector, angled, 2 m cable, flying YG2A18-020UA5XLEAX 2095779
leads
Female connector, angled, 5 m cable, flying YG2A18-050UA5XLEAX 2095780
leads
Female connector, angled, 10 m cable, flying YG2A18-100UA5XLEAX 2095781
leads

Table 112: Ordering information for M12 connection cable, 5-pin (0.34 mm2) 12)
Part Type code Part number
Female connector, straight, 0.6 m cable, male YF2A15-C60UB5M2A15 2096006
connector, straight
Female connector, straight, 1 m cable, male YF2A15-010UB5M2A15 2096007
connector, straight
Female connector, straight, 2 m cable, male YF2A15-020UB5M2A15 2096009
connector, straight
Female connector, straight, 5 m cable, male YF2A15-050UB5M2A15 2096010
connector, straight
Female connector, straight, 10 m cable, male YF2A15-100UB5M2A15 2096011
connector, straight
Female connector, straight, 15 m cable, male YF2A15-150UB5M2A15 2096171
connector, straight

11) Ambient operating temperature: down to –30 °C with fixed installation.

12) Ambient operating temperature: Down to −30° C with fixed installation.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 209

Subject to change without notice
15 ACCESSORIES

Table 113: Ordering information for M12 connection cable, 8-pin (0.25 mm2) 13)
Part Type code Part number
Female connector, straight, 0.6 m cable, YF2A18-C60UA5M2A18 2096031
straight male connector
Female connector, straight, 1 m cable, straight YF2A18-010UA5M2A18 2096032
male connector
Female connector, straight, 20 m cable, YF2A18-020UA5M2A18 2096033
straight male connector
Female connector, straight, 1 m cable, straight YF2A18-050UA5M2A18 2096034
male connector
Female connector, straight, 10 m cable, YF2A18-100UA5M2A18 2096035
straight male connector
Female connector, straight, 15 m cable, YF2A18-150UA5M2A18 2104374
straight male connector

Table 114: Ordering information for connection cable (replacement of C4000 with deTec4) 13)
Part Type codes Part number
M12 connection cable, 5-pin to M12, 5-pin YF2A14-C20UB3M2A14 2096013
Connection cable, M12, 8-pin to M12, 8-pin DSL-6108GM25034KM1 2034865
Connection cable M12 8-pin to M26, 7-pin DSL-6130GM25034KM1 2081443
Connection cable M12 8-pin to M26, 12-pin DSL-6129GM25034KM1 2081442
Connection cable M12 8-pin to M26, 12-pin DSL-6129GM25034KM7 2112706

Table 115: Ordering information for connection cable (connection of an extension module) 14).
Part Type code Part number
Connection cable for connecting sender or YF2A15-C30S01M2A15 2139463
receiver to extension module M12, 5-pin to
M12, 8-pin
Connection cable for system connection M12, YF2A14-C30S01M2A14 2139464
8-pin to M12, 5-pin

Table 116: Ordering information for distributor

Part Type code Part number
T distributor, 5-pin DSC-1205T000025KM0 6030664
T distributor, 8-pin DSC-1208T000025KM0 6058647
T-connector with pushbutton for laser alignment aid, M12, 5-pin 2077933

Table 117: Ordering information for the connector

Part Part number
Muting connector 2092758
IO-Link connector 2092757

Table 118: Connection modules ordering information

Part Part number
SiLink2 master 1061790

Table 119: Sensor Integration Gateway ordering information

Part Part number
SIG200 REST-API 1102605

13) Ambient operating temperature: Down to −30° C with fixed installation.

14) Ambient operating temperature: down to −30 °C with fixed installation

210 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ACCESSORIES 15

Part Part number

SIG200 PROFINET 1089794
SIG200 Ethernet/IP 1089796

Table 120: Protective cap ordering information

Part Part number
Protective cap, M12 for female connector 5310772

Table 121: Ordering information for power supply

Part Type code Part number
Output 24 V DC, 50 W (2.1 A), voltage supply PS50WE24V 7028789
NEC Class 2, SELV, PELV, input 120 V AC …
240 V AC
Output 24 V DC, 95 W (3.9 A), voltage supply PS95WE24V 7028790
NEC Class 2, SELV, PELV, input 100 V AC …
120 V / 220 V AC … 240 V AC

Table 122: Ordering information for control switches

Part Type code Part number
Pushbutton, M12, 5-pin 1) ER12-SB3C5 6045316
Pushbutton with key switch, M12, 5-pin1) 2) ER12-SE6F5 6083587
1) Suitable for resetting or for override applications.
2) Reset and override are controlled separately.

Table 123: Ordering information for pushbuttons

Part Part number
Pushbutton for laser alignment aid, M12, 5-pin 2082166
Pushbutton for laser alignment aid, M12, 8-pin 2082167

15.6 Alignment aid

Table 124: Alignment aid ordering information
Part Part number
AR60 laser alignment aid 1015741
Adapter 1) 4070854
1) The adapter is mandatory for mounting the laser alignment aid on the ESPE.

15.7 Deflector mirrors

15.7.1 Function and use

Overview
Deflector mirrors can be used to shape the protective field to secure hazardous points
from multiple sides using a single safety light curtain.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 211

Subject to change without notice
15 ACCESSORIES

Figure 74: Example of use of deflector mirrors

Important information

DANGER
Hazard due to lack of effectiveness of the protective device
Persons and parts of the body to be protected may not be recognized in case of
non-observance.
► Only mount deflector mirrors to solid walls or machine components. The position
of the deflector mirrors must not change after alignment.
► Do not use deflector mirrors if contamination, beading water, condensation, or
frost on the deflector mirrors is to be expected.
► Make sure that the deflector mirrors are intact and free of scratches, contamina‐
tion, beading water, condensation, frost, etc. at all times.

Further topics
• "Mirror columns", page 214

15.7.2 Change in scanning range using deflector mirrors

Important information

NOTE
The use of deflector mirrors reduces the scanning range depending on the number of
deflector mirrors in the protective field.

Table 125: Scanning range with and without 1 or 2 deflector mirrors

Type Resolution Scanning Scanning range with Scanning range with
range, typi‐ 1 deflector mirror, typi‐ 2 deflector mirrors, typi‐
cal cal cal
PNS75, PNS125 14 mm 20 m D1 + D2 ≤ 18 m D1 + D2 + D3 ≤ 16.2 m
PNS75, PNS125 30 mm 30 m D1 + D2 ≤ 27 m D1 + D2 + D3 ≤ 24.3 m

Example: Recommended distance when using deflector mirrors

This example assumes a 90° beam deflection per mirror, and a protective field height
of 900 mm.

212 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ACCESSORIES 15

When using a PNS75 deflector mirror, we recommend a separation of D1, D2, D3 ≤ 4 m

between the deflector mirror and device or between 2 mirrors.
When using a PNS125 deflector mirror, we recommend a separation of D1, D2, D3
≤ 8 m between the deflector mirror and the device or between 2 mirrors.

s s r
D1 D1 D3

D2 r D2

Figure 75: Recommended distance when using deflector mirrors

15.7.3 Deflector mirror PNS75 - ordering information

Table 126: Ordering information for PNS75 deflector mirror
Mirror length in mm Max. protective field Type code Part number
height in mm
340 300 PNS75-034 1019414
490 450 PNS75-049 1019415
640 600 PNS75-064 1019416
790 750 PNS75-079 1019417
940 900 PNS75-094 1019418
1090 1050 PNS75-109 1019419
1240 1200 PNS75-124 1019420
1390 1350 PNS75-139 1019421
1540 1500 PNS75-154 1019422
1690 1650 PNS75-169 1019423
1840 1800 PNS75-184 1019424
1990 1950 PNS75-199 1092962
2140 2100 PNS75-214 1092963

15.7.4 Deflector mirror PNS125 - ordering information

Table 127: Ordering information, deflector mirror PNS125
Mirror length in mm Max. protective field Type code Part number
height in mm
340 300 PNS125-034 1019425
490 450 PNS125-049 1019426
640 600 PNS125-064 1019427
790 750 PNS125-079 1019428
940 900 PNS125-094 1019429
1090 1050 PNS125-109 1019430
1240 1200 PNS125-124 1019431
1390 1350 PNS125-139 1019432
1540 1500 PNS125-154 1019433
1690 1650 PNS125-169 1019434

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 213

Subject to change without notice
15 ACCESSORIES

Mirror length in mm Max. protective field Type code Part number

height in mm
1840 1800 PNS125-184 1019435
1990 1950 PNS125-199 1092964
2140 2100 PNS125-214 1092965

15.8 Mirror columns

Table 128: Ordering information for PM4 mirror columns
Column height Type code Part number
995 mm PM4-A099110000000 1138910
1,095 mm PM4-A109110000000 1138911
1,195 mm PM4-A119110000000 1138912
1,295 mm PM4-A129110000000 1138913
1,475 mm PM4-A147110000000 1138914
1,625 mm PM4-A162110000000 1138915
1,775 mm PM4-A177110000000 1138916
1,925 mm PM4-A192110000000 1138917
2,075 mm PM4-A207110000000 1138918
2,225 mm PM4-A222110000000 1138919
2,375 mm PM4-A237110000000 1138920

Complementary information
Observe the information on deflector mirrors, particularly on changing the scanning
range.

Further topics
• "Deflector mirrors", page 211

15.9 Device columns

Table 129: Ordering information PP4 device columns (compact)
Column height Type code Part number
985 mm PP4-C098110000000 2139645
1,085 mm PP4-C108110000000 2139646
1,185 mm PP4-C118110000000 2139647
1,285 mm PP4-C128110000000 2139649
1,411 mm PP4-C141110000000 2139650
1,561 mm PP4-C156110000000 2139651
1,711 mm PP4-C171110000000 2139652
1,861 mm PP4-C186110000000 2139653
2,011 mm PP4-C201110000000 2139654
2,161 mm PP4-C216110000000 2139655
2,311 mm PP4-C231110000000 2139656

Table 130: Ordering information PC4 device columns (protected)

Column height Type code Part number
985 mm PC4-C098100000000 2139633

214 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ACCESSORIES 15

Column height Type code Part number

1,085 mm PC4-C108100000000 2139635
1,185 mm PC4-C118100000000 2139636
1,285 mm PC4-C128100000000 2139637
1,411 mm PC4-C141100000000 2139638
1,561 mm PC4-C156100000000 2139639
1,711 mm PC4-C171100000000 2139640
1,861 mm PC4-C186100000000 2139641
2,011 mm PC4-C201100000000 2139642
2,161 mm PC4-C216100000000 2139643
2,311 mm PC4-C231100000000 2139644

15.10 Cleaning agent

Table 131: Ordering information for cleaning agents
Part Part number
Lens cleaner (with label for North America, South America, Western Europe) 5606490
Lens cleaner (with label for Africa, Asia, Middle East) 5606721
Lens cleaner (with label for Northern Europe, Eastern Europe) 5606754
Lens cloth 4003353

15.11 Test rods

Table 132: Ordering information for test rods
Part Part number
Test rod 14 mm 2022599
Test rod 30 mm 2022602
Test rod holder 2052249

Table 133: Ordering information for test rods with reduced resolution
Part Part number
Test rod 24 mm 2045592
Test rod 34 mm 2045593

15.12 Muting accessories

Table 134: Ordering information for muting lamps
Part Part number
Muting indicator lamp, including M12 male connector and connection cable 2033118
(2 m), mounting bracket and mounting kit
Muting indicator lamp, incl. M12 male connector and connection cable 2033119
(10 m), mounting bracket and mounting kit
LED lamp, incl. mounting bracket and mounting kit 2129217

Table 135: Ordering information for muting sensors and reflectors 1)

Part Type code Part number
Photoelectric retro-reflective sensor GL6-P0211S49 1070568
GL6G-P0211S98 2142441

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 215

Subject to change without notice
15 ACCESSORIES

Part Type code Part number

GL6G-P1211 2045515
GL6G-P4211 1059632
GL10-P4151 1069860
GL10-F4551 1071153
Photoelectric proximity sensor GTB6-P7441S56 1077541
GTB10-P4411S01 1066852
Reflector P250 5304812
1) The specified muting sensors have been tested for the application and are therefore particularly recom‐
mended by SICK. A further selection of muting sensors are available at www.sick.com.

Table 136: Ordering information for muting sensor and reflector brackets
Part Part number
Muting bracket, fixed, for parallel muting, can be used for G6 muting sensor 2113145
or P250 reflector
Muting bracket, rotatable, for parallel muting or cross muting, can be used 2139886
for G6, G10, H18 muting sensor or P250 reflector

Table 137: Ordering information for muting arms

Part Part number
Muting arm, short, 200 mm 2111924
Muting arm, long, 400 mm 2111923
Cable cover for muting arm, 400 mm 2115890

Table 138: Ordering information for brackets for muting arms

Part Part number
Muting arm bracket for mounting on devices 1)
2106455
Muting arm bracket for mounting on device columns 1)
2140086
1) A muting arm bracket is essential for mounting a muting arm.

Table 139: Ordering information for muting arm kits

Part muting variant Scope of delivery Part number
L-muting arm kit, mounting Parallel muting • 2 muting arms, long 2139901
on the device, left 1) • 2 sensors
• 2 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
L-muting arm kit, mounting Parallel muting • 2 muting arms, long 2140130
on the device, right 1) • 2 sensors
• 2 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
T-muting arm kit, mounting Parallel muting • 4 muting arms, long 2139902
on the device • 4 sensors
• 4 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
X-muting arm kit, mounting Cross muting • 2 muting arms, long 2139900
on the device • 2 muting arms, short
• 2 sensors
• 2 reflectors
• Compatible brackets

216 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ACCESSORIES 15

Part muting variant Scope of delivery Part number

L-muting arm kit, mounting Parallel muting • 2 muting arms, long 2139904
on a device column, left 1) • 2 sensors
• 2 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
L-muting arm kit, mounting Parallel muting • 2 muting arms, long 2140131
on a device column, right 1) • 2 sensors
• 2 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
T-muting arm kit, mounting Parallel muting • 4 muting arms, long 2139905
on a device column • 4 sensors
• 4 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
X-muting arm kit, mounting Cross muting • 2 muting arms, long 2139903
on a device column • 2 muting arms, short
• 2 sensors
• 2 reflectors
• Compatible brackets
1) When looking at the front of the device.

Table 140: Ordering information for protective cover

Part Part number
Protective cover for muting sensors, right 2140187
Protective cover for muting sensors, left 2140186

15.13 Additional accessories

Table 141: Ordering information for information label
Part Part number
Information label for reduced resolution 1) 2) 2101711
1) The information label cannot be used in applications with configured Smart Box Detection.
2) The information label cannot be used in applications with a reduced resolution of more than two beams.

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 217

Subject to change without notice
16 ANNEX

16 Annex
16.1 Conformities and certificates
You can obtain declarations of conformity, certificates, and the current operating
instructions for the product at www.sick.com. To do so, enter the product part number
in the search field (part number: see the entry in the “P/N” or “Ident. no.” field on the
type label).

16.1.1 EU declaration of conformity

Excerpt
The undersigned, representing the manufacturer, herewith declares that the product is
in conformity with the provisions of the following EU directive(s) (including all applicable
amendments), and that the standards and/or technical specifications stated in the EU
declaration of conformity have been used as a basis for this.
• ROHS DIRECTIVE 2011/65/EU
• MACHINERY DIRECTIVE 2006/42/EC
• RE DIRECTIVE 2014/53/EU

16.1.2 UK declaration of conformity

Excerpt
The undersigned, representing the following manufacturer herewith declares that this
declaration of conformity is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer.
The product of this declaration is in conformity with the provisions of the following
relevant UK Statutory Instruments (including all applicable amendments), and the
respective standards and/or technical specifications have been used as a basis.
• Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Elec‐
tronic Equipment Regulations 2012
• Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008
• Radio Equipment Regulations 2017

16.2 Note on standards

Standards are specified in the information provided by SICK. The table shows regional
standards with similar or identical contents. Not every standard applies to all products.
Table 142: Note on standards
Standard Standard (regional)
China
IEC 60068-2-6 GB/T 2423.10
IEC 60068-2-27 GB/T 2423.5
IEC 60204-1 GB/T 5226.1
IEC 60529 GB/T 4208
IEC 60825-1 GB 7247.1
IEC 61131-2 GB/T 15969.2
IEC 61140 GB/T 17045
IEC 61496-1 GB/T 19436.1
IEC 61496-2 GB/T 19436.2
IEC 61496-3 GB 19436.3
IEC 61508 GB/T 20438

218 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 ANNEX 16

Standard Standard (regional)

China
IEC 62061 GB 28526
ISO 13849-1 GB/T 16855.1
ISO 13855 GB/T 19876

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 219

Subject to change without notice
16 ANNEX

16.3 Checklist for initial commissioning and commissioning

Checklist for manufacturers or installers for installing electro-sensitive protective
device (ESPE)
The details relating to the items listed below must be available no later than when the
system is commissioned for the first time. However, these depend on the specific appli‐
cation (the requirements of which must be reviewed by the manufacturer or installer).
This checklist should be retained and kept with the machine documentation to serve as
reference during recurring tests.
This checklist does not replace the initial commissioning, nor the regular inspection by
qualified safety personnel.
Have the safety rules and regulations been observed in compliance with the Yes ⃞ No ⃞
directives and standards applicable to the machine?
Are the applied directives and standards listed in the declaration of conformity? Yes ⃞ No ⃞
Does the protective device correspond to the required PL/SIL and PFH in Yes ⃞ No ⃞
accordance with ISO 13849-1/IEC 62061 and the required type in accordance
with IEC 61496-1?
Is access to the hazardous area or hazardous point only possible through the Yes ⃞ No ⃞
protective field of the ESPE?
Have appropriate measures been taken to protect (mechanical protection) or Yes ⃞ No ⃞
monitor (protective devices) any persons or objects in the hazardous area when
protecting a hazardous area or hazardous point, and have these devices been
secured or locked to prevent their removal?
Are additional mechanical protective measures fitted and secured against Yes ⃞ No ⃞
manipulation which prevent reaching below, above or around the ESPE?
Has the maximum shutdown and/or stopping time of the machine been meas‐ Yes ⃞ No ⃞
ured, specified and documented (at the machine and/or in the machine docu‐
mentation)?
Has the ESPE been mounted such that the required minimum distance from the Yes ⃞ No ⃞
nearest hazardous point has been achieved?
Are the ESPE devices properly mounted and secured against manipulation after Yes ⃞ No ⃞
alignment?
Are the required protective measures against electric shock in effect (protection Yes ⃞ No ⃞
class)?
Is the control switch for resetting the protective devices (ESPE) or restarting the Yes ⃞ No ⃞
machine present and correctly installed?
Are the outputs of the ESPE (OSSDs or safety outputs via the network) inte‐ Yes ⃞ No ⃞
grated according to the required PL/SIL in accordance with ISO 13849-1 / IEC
62061 and does the integration correspond to the circuit diagrams?
Has the protective function been checked in compliance with the test notes of Yes ⃞ No ⃞
this documentation?
Are the specified protective functions effective at every operating mode that can Yes ⃞ No ⃞
be set?
Are the switching elements activated by the ESPE, e.g. contactors, valves, moni‐ Yes ⃞ No ⃞
tored?
Is the ESPE effective over the entire period of the dangerous state? Yes ⃞ No ⃞
Once initiated, will a dangerous state be stopped when switching the ESPE on Yes ⃞ No ⃞
or off and when changing the operating mode, or when switching to another
protective device?

220 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 LIST OF FIGURES 17

17 List of figures
1. Laser class 1...............................................................................................................11
2. SICK product ID...........................................................................................................13
3. Sender and receiver................................................................................................... 14
4. Overview of the device (sender or receiver)..............................................................15
5. NFC symbol ................................................................................................................ 16
6. Sender displays...........................................................................................................20
7. Receiver displays........................................................................................................ 21
8. Hazardous point protection........................................................................................23
9. Access protection....................................................................................................... 24
10. Hazardous area protection.........................................................................................24
11. Access protection with smart presence detection, implemented using cascade.. 25
12. Minimum distance to the hazardous point for orthogonal (rectangular) approach
to the protective field..................................................................................................32
13. Representation of the accessibility of ESPE by reaching over. Left: Protective field
that cannot be reached over. Right: Protective field that can be reached over......33
14. Minimum distance from reflective surfaces............................................................. 33
15. Graph of minimum distance from reflective surfaces............................................. 34
16. Preventing mutual interference of system 1 and system 2.................................. 36
17. Trouble-free operation due to beam coding..............................................................37
18. Trouble-free operation due to reversed direction of transmission of system 1 and
system 2.................................................................................................................... 38
19. Trouble-free operation of 4 neighboring systems due to beam coding and reversed
direction of transmission........................................................................................... 38
20. Trouble-free operation with sufficient distance........................................................40
21. Cross muting............................................................................................................... 43
22. Exit monitoring............................................................................................................ 45
23. Serial arrangement of the muting sensors............................................................... 47
24. Parallel arrangement of the muting sensors............................................................ 47
25. Muting ends as soon as the ESPE is clear again (example for exit monitoring).....50
26. Signal sequence with configured supplementary signal during a muting cycle
(example for entry/exit monitoring)........................................................................... 54
27. Partial muting..............................................................................................................55
28. Signal sequence with configured supplementary signal during a muting cycle
(example for entry/exit monitoring)........................................................................... 56
29. Smart Box Detection application example................................................................60
30. Left: Rectangular shadow without gaps. Right: Shadow with gaps.........................61
31. Smart Box Detection: Object properties....................................................................61
32. Lateral object edge tolerance for an uncoded system.............................................62
33. Lateral object edge tolerance for a coded system................................................... 63
34. Object distance and object width dependent on object speed............................... 63
35. Dual-channel and isolated connection of OSSD1 and OSSD2................................72
36. No potential difference between load and protective device.................................. 72
37. Schematic representation of operation with restart interlock.................................74
38. Electrical diagram of the reset device.......................................................................74
39. Electrical diagram of external device monitoring (EDM).......................................... 77
40. Electrical diagram of the application diagnostic output.......................................... 77
41. Switch for the integrated laser alignment aid........................................................... 82
42. Cascade.......................................................................................................................84
43. Test rod check: Step 1................................................................................................92
44. Test rod check: Step 3................................................................................................92
45. Fitting the system plug............................................................................................... 95
46. Sender and receiver must not be installed such that they are rotated 180° relative
to each other...............................................................................................................96
47. Mounting the QuickFix bracket on a profile............................................................100

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 221

Subject to change without notice
17 LIST OF FIGURES

48. Mounting the FlexFix bracket to a profile frame.....................................................101

49. Inserting the safety light curtain in the FlexFix brackets....................................... 102
50. Dual-channel and isolated connection of OSSD1 and OSSD2............................. 105
51. No potential difference between load and protective device................................106
52. System connection (male connector, M12, 5-pin)................................................. 106
53. System connection (male connector M12, 8-pin)..................................................107
54. Extension connection (female connector M12, 5-pin)...........................................108
55. Additional connections on the DMM4 extension module (female connector, M12,
5-pin)......................................................................................................................... 109
56. SP1 system plug with 2 DIP switches..................................................................... 115
57. SP2 system plug with 14 DIP switches................................................................... 115
58. Configuring beam coding......................................................................................... 117
59. DIP switch for muting on the SP2 system plug.......................................................118
60. DIP switch for the protective field widths on the SP2 system plug....................... 120
61. DIP switch for reduced resolution on SP2 system plug......................................... 121
62. DIP switch for smart presence detection on SP2 system plug..............................122
63. DIP switch for Smart Box Detection on SP2 system plug...................................... 123
64. DIP switch for parity on SP2 system plug............................................................... 124
65. Reset to factory settings.......................................................................................... 129
66. “Overview” page for a deTec4 system with DMM4 ............................................... 134
67. Hardware configuration page for a deTec system with DMM4.................................. 136
68. QuickFix bracket: adjustment..................................................................................155
69. FlexFix bracket: adjustment/rotation......................................................................156
70. Message history....................................................................................................... 182
71. Live view....................................................................................................................184
72. Dimensional drawing of sender and receiver.........................................................203
73. Mount the weld spark guard....................................................................................208
74. Example of use of deflector mirrors........................................................................212
75. Recommended distance when using deflector mirrors.........................................213

222 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 LIST OF TABLES 18

18 List of tables
1. Target groups and selected sections of these operating instructions.......................8
2. Function packages......................................................................................................16
3. Function packages and included functions.............................................................. 16
4. Use of SP1 system plug in a single system...............................................................18
5. Use of SP2 system plug in a single system...............................................................18
6. Use of system plugs in a cascade............................................................................. 18
7. Sender displays...........................................................................................................20
8. Receiver displays........................................................................................................ 21
9. Colors and their meaning...........................................................................................21
10. Indication of the configuration status....................................................................... 22
11. Alignment quality display........................................................................................... 22
12. Fault indication........................................................................................................... 22
13. Warnings......................................................................................................................23
14. Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (full transmitting
power, resolution 14 mm).......................................................................................... 28
15. Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (reduced trans‐
mitting power, resolution 14 mm)............................................................................. 29
16. Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (full transmitting
power, resolution 30 mm).......................................................................................... 29
17. Resulting ranges with manual setting of the protective field width (reduced trans‐
mitting power, resolution 30 mm)............................................................................. 29
18. Formula for calculating the minimum distance to reflective surfaces with auto‐
matic calibration of the protective field width.......................................................... 34
19. Formula for calculating the minimum distance to reflective surfaces when man‐
ually setting the protective field width (resolution 14 mm)..................................... 35
20. Formula for calculating the minimum distance to reflective surfaces when man‐
ually setting the protective field width (resolution 30 mm)..................................... 35
21. Effective resolution with reduced resolution (Basic)................................................41
22. Conditions for entry/exit monitoring..........................................................................47
23. Input signals from bandstop...................................................................................... 57
24. Permitted object properties....................................................................................... 62
25. Upper and lower object edge tolerance depends on the reduced resolution.........63
26. Supplement ZSBD.........................................................................................................64
27. Effective resolution with Smart Box Detection in combination with reduced resolu‐
tion...............................................................................................................................65
28. Valid combinations of input signals at connection X3 (safety inputs).................... 68
29. Calculation of the object sizes for the smart restart interlock................................ 76
30. Available output signals............................................................................................. 78
31. Combined output signals........................................................................................... 79
32. Side and rear mounting with the QuickFix bracket...................................................99
33. Lateral and rear mounting with the FlexFix bracket...............................................101
34. System connection pin assignment SP1 or SP2 (male connector, M12, 5-pin).. 106
35. Pin assignment of SP1 or SP2 system connection (male connector, M12, 8-pin)....
107
36. Pin assignment of system connection on the extension module (M12 plug, 8-pin)
...................................................................................................................................108
37. Pin assignment of SP1 or SP2 extension connection (female connector, M12, 5-
pin)............................................................................................................................ 108
38. Pin assignment of A1, A2, B1, B2 connections (DMM4, female connector, M12, 5-
pin)............................................................................................................................ 110
39. Pin assignment of X1, X2, X3 connections (DMM4, female connector, M12, 5-pin)
...................................................................................................................................110
40. Factory settings of the configurable functions.......................................................112
41. Configuration mode..................................................................................................113

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 223

Subject to change without notice
18 LIST OF TABLES

42. Functions and their configuration type................................................................... 114

43. Overview of DIP switches......................................................................................... 115
44. Possible combinations of functions on SP2 system plug...................................... 116
45. DIP switches and beam coding............................................................................... 117
46. DIP switch and muting............................................................................................. 118
47. Settings depending on the muting variant............................................................. 119
48. DIP switches and scanning range........................................................................... 121
49. DIP switches and reduced resolution......................................................................122
50. DIP switch and smart presence detection..............................................................123
51. DIP switch and Smart Box Detection...................................................................... 123
52. Output signals on the system connection and extension connection.................. 126
53. Functions and their limitations................................................................................135
54. Available elements for the hardware configuration............................................... 137
55. User groups...............................................................................................................148
56. Options for restoring the configuration when replacing the device...................... 149
57. Alignment quality display......................................................................................... 157
58. Indications on the sender when switching on........................................................ 163
59. Indications on the receiver when switching on.......................................................163
60. Alignment quality display......................................................................................... 165
61. LEDs on the sender during normal operation........................................................ 167
62. LEDs on the receiver during normal operation.......................................................167
63. Fault indication on the sender.................................................................................173
64. Fault indication on the receiver...............................................................................175
65. Message history....................................................................................................... 183
66. Data recorder............................................................................................................184
67. Version numbers and functional scope of the receiver......................................... 188
68. Version numbers and functional scope of the sender...........................................188
69. General system data................................................................................................ 189
70. Mechanical data.......................................................................................................191
71. Technical data for sender........................................................................................ 191
72. Technical data for receiver.......................................................................................191
73. Operating data..........................................................................................................193
74. Maximum number of beams for a standalone device........................................... 193
75. Maximum number of beams in a cascade with one guest................................... 194
76. Maximum number of beams in a cascade with two guest devices...................... 194
77. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 300 mm 195
78. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 450 mm 195
79. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 600 mm 195
80. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 750 mm 195
81. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 900 mm 195
82. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,050 mm
...................................................................................................................................195
83. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,200 mm
...................................................................................................................................196
84. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,350 mm
...................................................................................................................................196
85. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,500 mm
...................................................................................................................................196
86. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,650 mm
...................................................................................................................................196
87. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,800 mm
...................................................................................................................................196
88. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 1,950 mm
...................................................................................................................................196
89. Response time of a single device in ms with protective field height of 2,100 mm
...................................................................................................................................197
90. Muting tolerance times............................................................................................ 198

224 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 LIST OF TABLES 18

91. Tolerance time for operating mode selection.........................................................199

92. Power consumption of sender and receiver (resolution 14 mm)..........................199
93. Power consumption of sender and receiver (resolution 30 mm)..........................199
94. Maximum lengths of cable for conductor cross section 0.34 mm2, copper wire 200
95. Maximum lengths of cable for conductor cross section 0.25 mm2, copper cable....
201
96. Maximum cable lengths for applications with the DMM4 extension module, copper
cable..........................................................................................................................201
97. Weight of sender and receiver.................................................................................202
98. Dimensions based on the protective field height, sender and receiver............... 203
99. Ordering information deTec4 14 mm resolution.................................................... 204
100. Ordering information deTec4 30 mm resolution.................................................... 204
101. Ordering information deTec4 14 mm resolution.................................................... 205
102. Ordering information deTec4 14 mm resolution.................................................... 205
103. Ordering information deTec4 30 mm resolution.................................................... 205
104. SP1 system plug ordering information....................................................................206
105. SP2 system plug ordering information....................................................................206
106. Brackets ordering information.................................................................................207
107. Mounting accessories ordering information...........................................................207
108. Ordering information for extension modules.......................................................... 207
109. Weld spark guard ordering information.................................................................. 208
110. Ordering information for M12 connecting cable, 5-pin (0.34 mm2) .................... 208
111. Ordering information for connection cable, M12, 8-pin (0.25 mm2) ...................209
112. Ordering information for M12 connection cable, 5-pin (0.34 mm2) ....................209
113. Ordering information for M12 connection cable, 8-pin (0.25 mm2) ....................210
114. Ordering information for connection cable (replacement of C4000 with deTec4)
...................................................................................................................................210
115. Ordering information for connection cable (connection of an extension module) .
...................................................................................................................................210
116. Ordering information for distributor........................................................................ 210
117. Ordering information for the connector.................................................................. 210
118. Connection modules ordering information............................................................. 210
119. Sensor Integration Gateway ordering information..................................................210
120. Protective cap ordering information........................................................................211
121. Ordering information for power supply....................................................................211
122. Ordering information for control switches...............................................................211
123. Ordering information for pushbuttons.................................................................... 211
124. Alignment aid ordering information.........................................................................211
125. Scanning range with and without 1 or 2 deflector mirrors....................................212
126. Ordering information for PNS75 deflector mirror...................................................213
127. Ordering information, deflector mirror PNS125..................................................... 213
128. Ordering information for PM4 mirror columns....................................................... 214
129. Ordering information PP4 device columns (compact)........................................... 214
130. Ordering information PC4 device columns (protected)..........................................214
131. Ordering information for cleaning agents............................................................... 215
132. Ordering information for test rods...........................................................................215
133. Ordering information for test rods with reduced resolution.................................. 215
134. Ordering information for muting lamps...................................................................215
135. Ordering information for muting sensors and reflectors ...................................... 215
136. Ordering information for muting sensor and reflector brackets............................216
137. Ordering information for muting arms.................................................................... 216
138. Ordering information for brackets for muting arms............................................... 216
139. Ordering information for muting arm kits............................................................... 216
140. Ordering information for protective cover............................................................... 217
141. Ordering information for information label............................................................. 217
142. Note on standards....................................................................................................218

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 225

Subject to change without notice
18 LIST OF TABLES

226 O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK

Subject to change without notice
 LIST OF TABLES 18

8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27 | SICK O P E R A T I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S | deTec4 227

Subject to change without notice
8021645/1RM2/2025-03-27/en

Australia Hungary Slovenia

Phone +61 (3) 9457 0600 Phone +36 1 371 2680 Phone +386 591 78849
1800 33 48 02 – tollfree E-Mail ertekesites@sick.hu E-Mail office@sick.si
E-Mail sales@sick.com.au India South Africa
Austria Phone +91-22-6119 8900 Phone +27 10 060 0550
Phone +43 (0) 2236 62288-0 E-Mail info@sick-india.com E-Mail info@sickautomation.co.za
E-Mail office@sick.at Israel South Korea
Belgium/Luxembourg Phone +972 97110 11 Phone +82 2 786 6321/4
Phone +32 (0) 2 466 55 66 E-Mail info@sick-sensors.com E-Mail infokorea@sick.com
E-Mail info@sick.be Italy Spain
Brazil Phone +39 02 27 43 41 Phone +34 93 480 31 00
Phone +55 11 3215-4900 E-Mail info@sick.it E-Mail info@sick.es
E-Mail comercial@sick.com.br Japan Sweden
Canada Phone +81 3 5309 2112 Phone +46 10 110 10 00
Phone +1 905.771.1444 E-Mail support@sick.jp E-Mail info@sick.se
E-Mail cs.canada@sick.com Malaysia Switzerland
Czech Republic Phone +603-8080 7425 Phone +41 41 619 29 39
Phone +420 234 719 500 E-Mail enquiry.my@sick.com E-Mail contact@sick.ch
E-Mail sick@sick.cz Mexico Taiwan
Chile Phone +52 (472) 748 9451 Phone +886-2-2375-6288
Phone +56 (2) 2274 7430 E-Mail mexico@sick.com E-Mail sales@sick.com.tw
E-Mail chile@sick.com Netherlands Thailand
China Phone +31 (0) 30 204 40 00 Phone +66 2 645 0009
Phone +86 20 2882 3600 E-Mail info@sick.nl E-Mail marcom.th@sick.com
E-Mail info.china@sick.net.cn New Zealand Turkey
Denmark Phone +64 9 415 0459 Phone +90 (216) 528 50 00
Phone +45 45 82 64 00 0800 222 278 – tollfree E-Mail info@sick.com.tr
E-Mail sick@sick.dk E-Mail sales@sick.co.nz United Arab Emirates
Finland Norway Phone +971 (0) 4 88 65 878
Phone +358-9-25 15 800 Phone +47 67 81 50 00 E-Mail contact@sick.ae
E-Mail sick@sick.fi E-Mail sick@sick.no United Kingdom
France Poland Phone +44 (0)17278 31121
Phone +33 1 64 62 35 00 Phone +48 22 539 41 00 E-Mail info@sick.co.uk
E-Mail info@sick.fr E-Mail info@sick.pl USA
Germany Romania Phone +1 800.325.7425
Phone +49 (0) 2 11 53 010 Phone +40 356-17 11 20 E-Mail info@sick.com
E-Mail info@sick.de E-Mail office@sick.ro Vietnam
Greece Singapore Phone +65 6744 3732
Phone +30 210 6825100 Phone +65 6744 3732 E-Mail sales.gsg@sick.com
E-Mail office@sick.com.gr E-Mail sales.gsg@sick.com
Hong Kong Slovakia
Phone +852 2153 6300 Phone +421 482 901 201
E-Mail ghk@sick.com.hk E-Mail mail@sick-sk.sk

Detailed addresses and further locations at www.sick.com

SICK AG | Waldkirch | Germany | www.sick.com